JP6881770B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result.

There is known a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state in which a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and a gaming value is given to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. In such a gaming machine, the progress of the gaming is controlled by sequentially performing control processing in the control device (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-110126

It is necessary for the control device to perform a wide variety of control processes, and it is necessary to efficiently create these control processes in a limited period of time at the development stage. An object of the present invention is to increase the efficiency of development.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is
In a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result.
A game control means that controls the game in an integrated manner ,
A subordinate control means that controls based on the information transmitted from the game control means is provided.
The information the game control means used are classified into groups defined by the type of information, each information included in said group while others unique number is different numbers in the individual information is attached, one By using only a part of the information included in the group, the unique number used is a discontinuous number.
The game control means
Is capable of executing a correction process for correcting the unique number is discontinuous such that the corrected number is a consecutive and number state, and are capable of performing processing relating to a game using the correction number ,
The slave control means
Among the information included in the group, the data corresponding to the information not used by the game control means is possessed .

According to the present invention, the efficiency of development can be improved.

It is a perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a figure explaining the structure of a special result. It is a figure explaining the operation mode in a special game state. It is a figure explaining the operation mode in a special game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a game state. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting change / confirmation process. It is a figure explaining the display in a performance display device. It is a flowchart explaining the start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the common processing of a special figure start port switch. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure hold information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure hold information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the look-ahead jackpot determination process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating game processing. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart explaining game processing. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart explaining game processing. Special Figure 1 It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating a special figure 1 fluctuation start process and a special figure 2 change start process. It is a flowchart explaining the fall lottery process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a figure explaining the decorative special figure command table. Special figure 1 This is a program list showing the program structure of the stop symbol setting process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating an information setting process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating a special figure 2 information setting process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating a variation pattern setting process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating a variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the fluctuation start information setting process. It is a figure explaining the fluctuation time value table. It is a figure explaining the variation pattern number correction table. This is a program list showing the program structure of the fluctuation start information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the time shortening fluctuation number update process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating processing during fluctuation. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating processing during fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining the process during display of special figure 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 display process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 display process. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end setting process 1 and the jackpot end setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end setting process 3. It is a flowchart explaining the process in small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the game machine state command transmission processing. It is a figure explaining the structure of the game machine state command. It is a figure which shows an example of the data structure of ROM which a game control device has. It is a figure explaining the jackpot determination. It is a flowchart explaining the main processing of an effect control device. It is a flowchart explaining the command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining the received command check process. It is a flowchart explaining the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart explaining the look-ahead symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining the look-ahead fluctuation system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining the variable system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining the main process of a payout control device. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interrupt processing of a payout control device. It is a flowchart explaining a command reception process. This is a program list showing the program structure of command reception processing. It is a flowchart explaining the payout device control start determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the payout busy signal editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the outline of a command process.

<First Embodiment>
As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable and rotatable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 for decoration and production, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. are displayed in an abnormality notification color (for example, red). A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) with (), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormality content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. A lamp for notifying the payout abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (storage plate) for supplying a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 are arranged. The outflowing upper plate ball outlet 22, the lower plate (receiver) 23 for storing the game balls paid out when the upper plate 21 is full, the operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launching device, and the like are provided. Further, the upper edge portion of the upper plate 21 is provided with an effect button 25 having a built-in effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player. Further, a touch panel 29 for receiving a contact operation input from the player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25. Further, on the lower right side of the front frame 12, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.
In the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25. A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

Further, to the right of the effect button 25, there is a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a discharge that is operated to eject a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A button 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the hitting ball launching device launches the gaming ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the gaming area 32 on the front surface of the gaming board 30. To do. In addition, by operating the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, the player can perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). It can be carried out.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-shaped game board main body 80 that serves as a mounting base for various members. The game board main body 80 is made of wood or synthetic resin, and the front surface of the game board main body 80 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and an outer peripheral wall (guide rail) 31 provided at each of the four corners of the game board 30. The game area 32 is provided. The gaming machine 10 is configured to launch a gaming ball from a hitting ball launching device into a gaming area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 to play a game. A windmill, an obstacle nail, or the like is arranged in the game area 32 as a member for changing the flow direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case 40 that forms a window portion that serves as a display area for a variable display game is attached to substantially the center of the game area 32. Behind the window portion formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) for variablely displaying a plurality of identification information is arranged.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (cathode ray tube). Still images and moving images can be displayed as effect images in the area (display area) where the image of the display screen can be displayed. Information about the game, such as a background image, that enhances the effect of the effect is displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variablely displayed), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for producing an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

In the center case 40, a warp flow path forming member 614 that forms a warp flow path for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a game ball that has passed through the warp flow path roll. A possible stage portion 620 is provided. Since the stage portion 620 of the center case 40 is arranged above the start winning opening 36, the game ball rolled on the stage portion 620 can easily win the starting winning opening 36.
Further, on the upper part of the center case 40, a board effect device 44 that produces a game by operating is provided. The board effect device 44 can operate from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

A normal symbol start gate (normal symbol start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40. Inside the normal drawing start gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 is provided. When the game ball driven into the game area 32 passes through the normal map start gate 34, the normal map variation display game is executed.

Two general winning openings 35 are arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball into the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3) provided in the general winning opening 35.

The game area 32 below the center case 40 is provided with a start winning opening 36 (first start winning area) that gives a start condition for the special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game). The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

On the right side of the center case 40, a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning area) that gives a start condition for the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game) is provided. The game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).
The ordinary variable winning device 37 includes a movable member (not shown), and the movable member always holds a closed closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player) in which the game ball cannot flow in. Then, when the result of the normal fluctuation display game is a predetermined result, the game ball is easily flowed into the normal fluctuation winning device 37 by the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device (game). It is designed to be changed to a state that is advantageous to the person.

In the present embodiment, the movable member of the ordinary variable winning device 37 is a so-called tongue-type ordinary electric accessory that opens and closes by advancing and retreating (sliding) in the front-rear direction by the normal variable winning device 37c. The movable member of 37 is not limited to this. The movable member of the ordinary variable winning device 37 may be, for example, an attacker-type ordinary electric accessory that is opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side by the ordinary electric solenoid 37c, or the ordinary electric solenoid 37c. It may be a tulip-shaped ordinary electric accessory that opens in an inverted "C" shape.
Further, the normal variable winning device 37 enables the winning of the game ball even when the movable member is closed, and the game ball may be less likely to be won in the closed state than in the open state.

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, the game ball is not accepted or easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game between the normal figure start gate 34 and the normal variation winning device 37. A convertible first special variable winning device (upper large winning opening) 38 is provided. The first special variable winning device 38 converts the upper large winning opening into a state in which a game ball can flow in by moving back and forth (sliding) the opening / closing member (not shown). The first special variable winning device 38 converts the upper prize opening from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, and facilitates the inflow of the game ball into the upper prize opening. , A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. The game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 38 is detected by the large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3).

Inside the upper prize opening (winning area), a specific area where game balls can flow in is provided, and a lever solenoid 38f (see FIG. 3) is provided so as to change the inflow probability of the game balls into the specific area. ) Is provided. A specific area switch 38d (see FIG. 3) capable of detecting the inflow of a game ball is provided in the specific area, and based on the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d, a state advantageous for the player can be obtained. It occurs (in the present embodiment, a high probability state occurs after the end of the special gaming state). The game ball that has flowed into the specific area is discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38.

Further, inside the upper prize opening, a residual ball discharge port switch 38e (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38 without flowing into a specific area is provided. ing. The number of game balls detected by the large prize opening switch 38a provided inside the upper large winning opening (the number of game balls flowing into the upper large winning opening), and detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e. By matching the number of game balls (the number of game balls discharged from the upper prize opening), it can be confirmed that all the game balls in the upper prize opening have been discharged, and basically until this confirmation is completed. Is not open to the new top prize opening.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, on the right side of the start winning opening 36, there is a second special variable winning that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A device (lower prize opening) 39 is provided. The second special variable winning device 39 converts the lower large winning opening into a state in which a game ball can flow in by moving (sliding) the opening / closing member (not shown) in the front-rear direction. The second special variable winning device 39 converts the lower prize opening from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, and facilitates the inflow of the game ball into the lower prize opening. , A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. The game ball that has won the second special variable winning device 39 is detected by the large winning opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 3).

The game area 32 below the start winning opening 36 is provided with an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that have not won in the winning opening or the like. Further, a special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 variation display game) and a normal figure variation display game are executed in the lower right corner of the game board main body 80 outside the game area 32. A batch display device 50 is provided.

The batch display device 50 includes a special figure 1 display (first special figure fluctuation display unit) 51 and a special figure 2 variable display for a special figure 1 variable display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) and the like. A special figure 2 display (second special figure variation display unit) 52 for a game, a first storage display unit 53 for notifying the start memory number of a special figure 1 variation display game composed of an LED lamp, and an LED lamp. A second storage display unit 54 for notifying the start memory number of the configured special figure 2 variable display game is provided.

Further, the batch display device 50 has a round display unit 55 that displays the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39), and is advantageous to the player among left-handed (normal) and right-handed. A first game state display unit 56 for notifying the hitting method (striking method corresponding to the game state) and a probability display unit 57 for notifying the probability state (high probability state or low probability state) of the special figure variation display game are provided. There is. The batch display device 50 has a probability state display unit that displays that the probability state of the jackpot is in the high probability state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and a display that lights up when a jackpot occurs to notify the occurrence of the jackpot. A unit (display) or the like may be provided.
Further, a normal map display unit 58 for displaying the normal map fluctuation display game, a storage display unit 59 for notifying the start memory number of the normal map fluctuation display game, and a time saving state that lights up when a time saving state occurs to notify the occurrence of the time saving state. A notification unit 60 and the like are provided.

The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is centered, for example, during the execution of the variation display game, that is, while the decorative special figure variation display game is being performed on the display device 41. Flashes the segment to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 100 msec. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51, in addition to the central segment, the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment is also blinked and driven. It is configured so that it is displayed that it is changing, and it is possible to distinguish between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Then, when the result of the game is "off", for example, the central segment (in the case of special figure 1, the eighth segment on the lower right side in addition) is turned on as the result mode of the off, and the result of the game is In the case of "hit", the result mode (for example, a number or a symbol) other than the out-of-order result mode (for example, a number or a symbol) is turned on as the hit result mode (special result mode), and the game result is displayed.

The first storage display unit 53 turns off a plurality of LEDs for the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = holding number) among the number of winning balls to the starting winning opening 36, which is a variable start condition of the special figure 1 display 51. , Lights (blinks) to display.
The second storage display unit 54 sets the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = holding number) among the number of winning balls to the normal variable winning device 37, which is the fluctuation start condition of the special figure 2 display 52, of the plurality of LEDs. Displayed by turning off and on (blinking).
The round display unit 55 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and turns off all the LEDs when not in the special game state, and turns on the LEDs corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result during the special game state. Turn it on. The round display unit 55 may be composed of a 7-segment type display.

The first game state display unit 56 is composed of an LED lamp or the like. For example, in the case of a game state in which left-handed hitting is more advantageous to the player than right-handed hitting (normal hitting), all the LEDs are turned off and left. When right-handed is more advantageous to the player than right-handed (when right-handed), all LEDs are turned on.
The probability display unit 57 is composed of an LED lamp or the like. For example, when the probability state of the jackpot is a low probability state (normal probability state), all the LEDs are turned off, and the probability state of the jackpot is a high probability state (probability change state). In the case of, all the LEDs are turned on.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls a game, and a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It is composed of a CPU unit 110 having a CPU unit 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. ..

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates an operating clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. A predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 to enable operation. Will be done.

The power supply device 400 is a normal power supply unit having an AC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V, DC5V, etc. from a voltage of DC32V. It has a 410, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal that notifies the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of the power failure. It includes a control signal generation unit 430 and the like that generate and output a control signal such as a reset signal.

In this embodiment, the power supply unit 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, the main unit. It may be configured to be provided on a substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the above, it is possible to reduce the cost by excluding it from the target of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or even after the power is cut off. That is, the game control device 100 can store and retain information about the game even if a power failure occurs and the power supply to the game machine is stopped, and after the power failure is restored, the game can be restarted based on the stored information. It serves as a means for retaining the memory of game information. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and changes the power failure monitoring signal, and also resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. A reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal that resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C stores the work area of the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. It is used as. As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the content of the effect, and the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), and fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state (special gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the special result mode is adopted, a part of the plurality of display results is already derived and displayed at a stage where the display is not yet derived. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display. Refers to a display mode that does not exist. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After the display, when the variation display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variation display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example,). The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same). The state in which the identification information is used, except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from this reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), and so on. Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. Further, this reach state is included in the variation display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variation display game. That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it is out of order). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining the jackpot symbol, and a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (various types). A random number generation circuit for generating a variable pattern random number for determining (including the execution time of the variable display game in the variable display without reach or reach), a hit random number for determining the hit of the normal figure variable display game, etc. And a clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal for the CPU 111A with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) and a clock that gives an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. There is.

Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (big hit, small hit or miss) of the special figure variation display game, the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) of the special figure variation display game as the current game state. One of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables based on the number of start storages and the like. Here, the CPU 111A serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize ball. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and controls for paying out the lending ball.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, a starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, and so on. The winning opening switch 35a in the general winning opening 35, the large winning opening switch 38a in the first special variable winning device 38, the large winning opening switch 39a in the second special variable winning device 39, and the gate switch in the general drawing start gate 34. 34a, the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e arranged in the first special variable winning device 38, and the out ball detection switch 32a that detects all the game balls that have been fired into the game area 32 and finished the game. Interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 that is connected to and inputs a negative logic signal such as high level 11V and low level 7V supplied from these switches and converts it into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. Is provided. Since the input range of the proximity I / F121 is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is illegally shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is cut and floats. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as the above and output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124, or the fourth input port 126, and is read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the large winning port switches 38a and 39a, and the gate switch 34a are input to the second input port 123. Will be done. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the specific area switch 38d, the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e, and the out ball detection switch 32a are input to the fourth input port 126. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124.

Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on a front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10, a detection signal of a vibration sensor 65 for detecting the vibration of the game machine 10, and a game machine. The detection signal of the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of 10 and the detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like of the game machine 10 are also input. It has become.

Further, a signal from the setting key switch 152 for detecting the operation of the setting key operation unit is input to the third input port 124. The setting key operation unit is provided with a keyhole into which the setting key is inserted, and is configured so that the setting key can be turned from the first position to the second position (predetermined state) only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. .. The setting key switch 152 is a sensor that can detect that it is in the state of being turned to the second position, and is turned on when it is in the state of being turned to the second position, and is in the state of not being turned to the second position. In some cases, it turns off.

The RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation unit are operation units for selecting from a plurality of probability setting values to which probability values that give special results in the special figure variation display game are assigned, and operate these operation units. As a result, it is possible to select a probability setting value to which a probability value that gives a special result is assigned in the special figure fluctuation display game, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value is used in the game. There is. Here, six probability setting values, "setting 1" to "setting 6", are prepared.

When selecting the probability setting value, the probability setting value is set by turning on the power of the gaming machine while operating (pressing) the RAM initialization switch 112 with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position. Is set to the probability setting value change mode in which the probability setting value can be changed, and the probability setting value can be changed by operating (pressing) the RAM initialization switch 112 during the probability setting value change mode. The selected probability setting value is displayed on the performance display device 153 for displaying the calculated base value and the accessory ratio. Specifically, the performance display device 153 displays the probability set value information while the operation related to the probability set value is being performed (during the probability set value change mode and the probability set value confirmation mode), and other than that. In, the calculated base value and the accessory ratio are displayed.

Further, by turning on the power of the gaming machine while the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the second position (the RAM initialization switch 112 is not operated), the currently selected probability setting value is set to the performance display device. It is displayed in 153, but the probability setting value cannot be changed. The probability setting value confirmation mode is set. The RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation unit cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened.
The performance display device 153 is a 7-segment display, and displays the probability set value by a number of 1 to 6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and any display mode that can recognize the probability set value may be used. Further, a display device of another type such as a liquid crystal display device may be used, or a probability set value may be indicated by the lighting mode of one or a plurality of LEDs, the emission color, and the like.

Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 and the output to the fourth input port 126 (excluding the detection signal of the out ball detection switch 32a) are from the main board 100 to the relay board 70. It is also supplied to a test firing test device (not shown) via. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 receives a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detecting a radio wave) and a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 indicates whether or not the command can be accepted), payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating payout abnormality), shoot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (it is full)), and a touch switch signal (for input of a touch switch provided on the operation unit 24). A first input port 122 is provided which takes in (based on a signal) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122, and are taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET whose noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, so that the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 is turned off in order to output to the test firing test apparatus. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, 124, 126 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent system malfunction, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the game microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input from the effect control device 300 to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of the accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like are transmitted via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start port switch output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61, the panel radio wave sensor 62, and the vibration sensor 65, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, a game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test device via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the machine cannot control the game. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal that does not go through the buffer, and the like. There is. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a second output port 134 connected to the data bus 140. The second output port 134 is a first large winning opening solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 1) 38b for opening the first special variable winning device 38, and a second large winning opening solenoid (large) for opening the second special variable winning device 39. The operation data of the winning port solenoid 2) 39b, the lever solenoid 38f for operating the lever member in the first special variable winning device 38, and the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening the normal variable winning device 37 are output and are currently selected. This port is for outputting the display data of the performance display device 153 that displays the stochastic set value.
Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, amusement hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in a game store, and can provide information about the game machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the operation data signals of the large winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b, the lever solenoid 38f, and the general electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. It is output from the second driver 138b and the fourth output port 136 that output the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the driver (drive circuit) 138a and the third output port 135. The external information signal supplied from the third driver 138c and the fifth output port 137 that output the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current drawing side of the batch display device 50 to the external device such as the management device is sent to the external information terminal board 71. A fourth driver 138d to output and a fifth driver 138e to generate and output a drive signal by receiving the display data signal of the performance display device 153 output from the second output port 134 are provided. Data is transmitted from the second output port 134 to the fifth driver 138e by serial communication.

DC32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. DC5V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as the power supply voltage to the fifth driver 138e so that the performance display device 153 operating at 5V can be driven.
Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws a current from the cathode terminal via the segment wire. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 2 and the LEDs are turned on.
The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied.
The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can communicate with the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, 124, 126 are provided. Absent.

Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the winning port switch 35a, the large winning port switches 38a, 39a, and the gate. The switch 34a is provided with a coil for magnetic detection, and a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball by utilizing the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil is used. Has been done. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 and the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like are microswitches having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 is used to display images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 111. It is provided with a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

The main control microcomputer 311 holds a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read-only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. A possible FeRAM 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timing means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the production content, instructs the VDP 312 about the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 of the reproduced sound, lights the decorative lamp, and the motor. And the drive control of the solenoid, the management of the production time, and so on.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311 are a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in VRAM. The wait signal WAIT and the like for this is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The effect control command signal (effect command) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via this command I / F331, such as a decoration special figure hold number command, a decoration special figure command, a variation command, and a stop information command. ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5 V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. There is.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 and a glass frame 15 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect provided on a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 and a game board 30 (including a center case 40) for driving and controlling a frame decoration device having an LED (light emitting diode) (for example, a frame decoration device 18 or the like). A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling a device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. Even if the glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect) and is provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. The function of detecting the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) and inputting the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 having a function of detecting the above and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above configuration and the electronic components controlled by the effect control device 300. DC32V, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motors and LEDs, DC5V for driving command I / F331, and DC15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. It is configured to do. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC-for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. Further, the VDP 312 (VDP RESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving the speaker, and the control circuit 332-334 (IOReSET) for driving and controlling the lamp and the motor are output from the main control microcomputer 311. It is supplied to the signal) and puts them in the reset state. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

That is, the effect control device 300 serves as a slave control means that controls based on the information transmitted from the game control device 100, and controls the effect based on the effect information (command) transmitted from the game control device 100. It serves as a production control means to be performed. Further, the CPU 311 serves as an effect calculation processing means which is an arithmetic processing means for performing arithmetic processing for the effect, and serves as an effect information storage means having an effect information storage area for storing the effect information received by the RAM 322.

Next, the configuration of the payout control device 200 will be described with reference to FIG. The payout control device 200 includes a CPU unit 210 having a payout microcomputer (CPU) 211 made of an amusement chip (IC), an input unit 220 having an input port, an output port, a driver, and the like, similarly to the game microcomputer 111. It includes an output unit 230, a data bus 240 for connecting the CPU unit 210, the input unit 220, and the output unit 230.

The CPU unit 210 includes a payout microcomputer (CPU) 211 and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and is an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) that generates an operating clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. ) 213 and the like.

The payout microcomputer 211 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 211A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 211B, and a RAM (random access memory) 211C that can be read and written at any time. Further, the payout microcomputer 211 generates a timer interrupt signal for the CPU 211A with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) and a clock for updating the random number generation circuit based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 213. It has a clock generator to oscillate.

The CPU 211A executes a control program in the ROM 211B, and based on a payout command (prize ball command) from the game control device 100 and an input of a ball lending request signal from the card unit 600, a predetermined number of game balls (prize balls). , Ball rental) is controlled to be discharged from the payout device.

The ROM 211B non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 211C is used as a work area of the CPU 211A and a storage area for various signals during game control. As the ROM 211B or the RAM 211C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

The input unit 220 is provided with an interface chip (proximity I / F) 221. A frame radio wave sensor 84 provided on the front frame 12 for detecting the emission of radio waves and a payout ball detection switch 81 for detecting the game ball to be paid out are connected to the proximity I / F 221. A negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from the switch of 0V-5V is converted into a positive logic signal. As described above, the proximity I / F 221 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F221 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

Since the input range of the proximity I / F221 is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is illegally shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is cut and floats. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as the above and output an abnormality detection signal 1.

The output of the proximity I / F 221 is supplied to the input port 223 and read into the payout microcomputer 211 via the data bus 240. Further, the input port 223 has a shoot ball out switch 82 that detects a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow that detects that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (it is full). The detection signal of the switch 83 and the communication signal from the card unit 600 connected via the photocoupler 226 are also input. Further, an operation signal from an error release switch 227 provided in the payout control device 200 and for canceling an error generated by radio wave detection or the like is also input to the input port 223. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F221, the detection signal of the payout ball detection switch 81 is also supplied to a test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 90.

The data held by the input port 223 can be read by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the payout microcomputer 211 decoding the address assigned to the input port 223.

Further, the payout control device 200 relays a touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided in the operation unit 24 output from the launch control device 700, and outputs the touch switch signal to the game control device 100. Further, the payout control device 200 relays the launch permission signal output from the game control device 100 and outputs the launch permission signal to the launch control device 700.

Further, the payout control device 200 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 225 for inputting a reset signal from the power supply device 400 and a payout command (prize ball command) from the game control device 100 to the payout microcomputer 211 or the like. , Schmidt buffer 225 has a function of removing noise from these input signals.

The reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 225 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the payout microcomputer 211 and is supplied to each port of the output unit 230. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the input port 223 of the input unit 220. The data set in each port of the output unit 230 by the payout microcomputer 211 just before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset to prevent system malfunction, but is discharged from the input port 223 just before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the use microcomputer 211 is discarded by resetting the payout microcomputer 211.

Further, a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the payout control device 200, and the payout control device 200 and the payout motor 91 driven by the payout control device 200 and the like are supplied. Electronic components can be operated. Further, a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is also supplied to the emission control device 700 via the payout control device 200.

The output unit 230 is connected to the data bus 240 and includes a first output port 231 for outputting a launch permission signal 2 as a data signal to the launch control device 700. A launch permission signal generated by the game control device 100 and a launch permission signal 2 generated by the payout control device 200 are input to the launch control device 700, and at least one of them transmits a launch prohibition signal. When it is output, it is set to the prohibited state, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited. Further, from the first output port 231, a data signal provided in the payout control device 200 and controlling the error status display device 250 that displays the error generated in the payout control device 200 according to the lighting mode of the LED is also output.

Further, the output unit 230 is connected to the data bus 240 and includes a second output port 232 for outputting a data signal to the game control device 100. From the payout control device 200, a frame radio wave illegal signal indicating that the frame radio wave sensor 84 provided on the front frame 12 has detected a radio wave to the game control device 100 via the second output port, the payout control device 200 A payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control can be started, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shoot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow switch signal indicating an overflow are output.

Further, the output unit 230 is connected to the data bus 240 and is connected to the third output port 233 for outputting the operation data signal of the payout motor 91 of the payout device, the data signal to the external device, and the data signal to the card unit 600. Is provided.

Further, the output unit 230 is provided with a first driver (drive circuit) 236 that receives an operation data signal of the payout motor 91 output from the third output port 233 and generates and outputs a motor drive signal. Further, the third output port 233 outputs the external information signal supplied to the external device such as the management device to the external information terminal plate 71, and the third output port 233 outputs the data signal supplied to the card unit 600. Two drivers 237 are provided. These drivers are supplied with the required power supply voltage.

The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, amusement hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in a game store, and can provide information about the game machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, the payout control device 200 is provided with a photocoupler 238 for transmitting a data signal to the card unit 600.

Further, the output unit 230 is configured to be mountable with a fourth output port 234 connected to the data bus 240 and outputting various signals to a test firing test device of an accreditation body (not shown) via the relay board 70. The fourth output port 234 is a component that is not mounted on the payout control device 200 of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in a game store.

Further, the output unit 230 is provided with a photocoupler 239 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 239 is configured so that the payout microcomputer 211 can communicate with the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the transmission / reception of such data is performed using the serial communication terminal of the payout microcomputer 211 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, a port such as the input port 223 is not provided.

That is, the payout control device 200 serves as a slave control means that controls based on the information transmitted from the game control device 100, and controls the payout of the game medium based on the payout information transmitted from the game control device 100. It serves as a payout control means. Further, the CPU 211A serves as a payout calculation processing means which is an arithmetic processing means for performing arithmetic processing on the payout, and serves as a payout information storage means having a payout information storage area for storing the payout information received by the RAM 211C.

FIG. 6 shows the jackpot probability, the fall probability, the small hit probability, and the distribution probability of the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. The big hit is a special result (first special result) with the operation of the condition device, and the small hit is a special result (second special result) without the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure fluctuation display game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and it is special as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning devices 38 and 39 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is activated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case where the small hit lottery is won, for example. The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on / off electrically. Further, "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

The jackpot probability value (probability value), which is the probability of a jackpot (first special result), is common to Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, and the probability value in the low probability state and the probability value in the high probability state are respectively. The probability value is as shown in FIG. 6A.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6A, the same probability value is assigned as the probability value in the high probability state to all of "setting 1" to "setting 6", but different probabilities. A value may be assigned. That is, the probability value in the high probability state may be switchable in multiple stages.
Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6A, the same probability value is assigned to "setting 1" and "setting 2" as the probability value in the low probability state, but different probability values are assigned. It may be assigned. The same applies to "setting 3" and "setting 4", and "setting 5" and "setting 6". That is, the probability value in the low probability state is not limited as long as it can be switched in multiple stages. Further, the same probability value may be assigned to all of "setting 1" to "setting 6" as the probability value in the low probability state. That is, the probability value in the low probability state may not be switchable in multiple stages.

Further, the effect distribution and the like may be different between "setting 1" and "setting 2" having the same probability value in the assigned low probability state. The same applies to "setting 3" and "setting 4", and "setting 5" and "setting 6".
Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6A, there are six probability setting values (“setting 1”) for three types of probability values (probability value in the low probability state and probability value in the high probability state). "~" Setting 6 ") is assigned, but for example, three probability setting values (for example," setting 1 "to" setting 3 ") are assigned to three types of probability values, and the remaining three probability setting values (for example) are assigned. "Setting 4" to "Setting 6") may be omitted.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, in the special gaming state based on the big hit (first special gaming state), the gaming ball flows into the specific area (probability variation operating area) of the first special variable winning device 38 and is detected by the specific area switch 38d. By being played (passing V), the probability state becomes high after the end of the special game state, and the probability state becomes low when the fall lottery performed every time the special figure variation display game is executed is won. The probability of winning the fall lottery is as shown in FIG. 6 (b).
Further, regardless of which of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game results in a high probability state, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game Both are in a high probability state.

The small hit probability, which is the probability of a small hit (second special result), is as shown in FIG. 6 (c). This small hit probability is higher in Special Figure 2 than in Special Figure 1. In addition, the small hit probability is always constant regardless of the gaming state and the big hit probability. In the big hit and small hit lottery, the big hit and the small hit will not be won in duplicate. In the present embodiment, the small hit is not provided in the special figure 1 but is provided only in the special figure 2, that is, the small hit probability of the special figure 1 is 0, but the small hit is not limited to this, and for example, the small hit. May be provided in both Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2. Further, when the small hit is provided in both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the small hit probability may be the same in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the special figure 2 is better than the special figure 1. May be higher, and special figure 1 may be higher than special figure 2.

Further, FIG. 6D shows the jackpot types that can be selected in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, and the distribution probabilities of each jackpot type.
There are three types of jackpots (first special result) in the special figure 1 variable display game: 10R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 10R normal jackpot. Similarly, there are three types of jackpots (first special result) in the special figure 2 variable display game: 10R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 10R normal jackpot. These jackpot types are selected based on the jackpot symbol random numbers. The number of each jackpot type indicates the actual number of rounds, and the probability change indicates that the game ball is likely to flow into a specific area (probability change operation area) and is likely to become a high probability state (probability change state) after the end of the special game state. , It is shown that the possibility that the game ball flows into the specific area (probability change operation area) is low and it is difficult to reach the high probability state (probability change state) after the end of the special game state.
Here, the actual number of rounds is the number of rounds for which opening control is performed so that a winning ball is actually generated by opening the special variable winning devices 38 and 39. The number of each jackpot type is the number of rounds at the time of jackpot (the number of actual rounds + the number of rounds in which the opening time of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 is short and the opening control is performed so that the winning ball does not actually occur). You may.

In addition, a first special result may be provided in which the possibility that the game ball will flow into the specific area is lower than that of the probability variation jackpot, but the possibility that the game ball will flow into the specific area is higher than that of the normal jackpot.
Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game ball is in the high probability state depending on whether or not the game ball flows into the specific region (probability variation operation region), so that even if the jackpot type is the probability variation, it can be specified. If the game ball does not flow into the area, the high probability state does not occur, and even if the jackpot type is normal, if the game ball flows into the specific area, the high probability state occurs.

7 (a) to 7 (c) show the opening mode in each round for each jackpot type. The details of the opening mode are shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 7A, in the 10R probability variation jackpot, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened and the specific area (probability variation operation area) is opened in the first round, and a long opening with V is performed. The long opening with V is an opening mode in which the game ball is likely to flow into a specific region (probability variation operating region). Then, from the second round onward, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened, but the specific area is not opened, and a long opening without V is performed.
As shown in FIG. 7B, in the 4R probability variation jackpot, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened and the specific area (probability variation operation area) is opened in the first round, and a long opening with V is performed. Then, from the 2nd round to the 4th round, the 1st special variable winning device 38 is opened, but the specific area is not opened. A long opening without V is performed, and after the 5th round, the 1st special variable winning device 38 is opened. A specific area is not opened. Short opening without V is performed. The short opening without V is an opening mode in which the possibility that the game ball will flow into the winning opening is lower than the long opening without V. That is, the long opening without V is an opening mode in which a winning ball is actually generated, and the short opening without V is an opening mode in which the opening time is short and no winning ball is actually generated.

As shown in FIG. 7 (c), in the 10R normal jackpot, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened and the specific region (probability variation operating region) is opened in the first round, and a short opening with V is performed. The short opening with V is an opening mode in which the game ball may flow into a specific region (probability variation operating region) and is lower than the long opening with V. Then, from the second round onward, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened for a long without V.
The game ball can flow into the specific area (probability change operation area) only in the long opening with V and the short opening with V performed in the first round. That is, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the specific round, which is the round in which the gaming ball may flow into the specific area, is the first round. The specific round is not limited to the first round and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the specific round may be performed a plurality of times, such as the first round and the fifth round.

As shown in FIG. 8A, in the long opening without V, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened with the start of the round (t11), and the openable time of 25,000 msec elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9 pieces). When any of the conditions for winning the game ball of) is satisfied, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed to end the round (t12). After that, the upper prize opening remaining ball processing time is started (t12), the interval time is started when the upper prize winning opening remaining ball processing time ends (t13), and the next round is started when the interval time ends (t14). ). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

As shown in FIG. 8B, in the long opening with V, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened with the start of the round (t31). Further, the lever solenoid 38f is turned on with the start of the round, and the specific area switch 38d is enabled. When the lever solenoid 38f is OFF, the lever member covers a specific area and the game ball cannot flow in. When the lever solenoid 38f is ON, the lever member retracts from the specific area and the game ball can flow in. It becomes. Further, the state in which the specific area switch 38d is effective is a state in which the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d is treated as effective. On the other hand, the state in which the specific area switch 38d is invalid is a state in which even if the game ball is detected by the specific area switch 38d, it is treated as invalid.

The lever solenoid 38f is turned off when 64 msec has elapsed from the start of the round (t32). Then, 100 msec after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off, the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid (t33). That is, the game ball that has won a prize immediately after the first special variable prize device 38 is opened may flow into a specific area.

The first special variable winning device 38 is closed 200 msec after the start of the round (t34). Then, when 2700 msec elapses, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened again (t35), either the openable time of 25000 msec elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins. When the conditions are met, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed and the round ends (t39). After that, the upper prize opening remaining ball processing time is started (t39), the interval time is started when the upper prize winning opening remaining ball processing time ends (t41), and the next round is started when the interval time ends (t42). .. In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

Further, after the second opening (t35) of the first special variable winning device 38, the lever solenoid 38f is also turned on for a predetermined time (t36 to t37, t38 to t39). In addition, the specific area switch 38d is also effective (t36). The second opening of the first special variable winning device 38 is for a sufficiently long time, and the lever solenoid 38f remains ON for a long time, so that the game ball will almost certainly flow into the specific area. Become. Therefore, when the jackpot type is probabilistic, it will almost certainly be in a high probability state.

Further, the lever solenoid 38f can be turned on for a predetermined time even after the first special variable winning device 38 is closed (t40 to t43), and flows into the first special variable winning device 38 just before closing. It is possible for the game balls that have been played to flow into a specific area. The first special variable winning device 38 is closed due to the passage of the openable time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and the game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 are processed as the remaining ball of the upper prize opening. If all of them are discharged within the time, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off and the operation is terminated with the end of the remaining ball processing time (t41), and the specific area switch 38d is invalidated.

In addition, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed due to the passage of the openable time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and the game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 have the remaining ball processing time of the upper prize opening. If all of the lever solenoid 38f is discharged by the end of the period (t43) when the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state, the lever solenoid 38f is turned into the OFF state and operates when the discharge is completed. Is terminated, and the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid.
In addition, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed due to the passage of the openable time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and the game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 have the remaining ball processing time of the upper prize opening. If not all of the lever solenoid 38f is discharged by the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t43), the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t43) The lever solenoid 38f is turned off and the operation is terminated. In this case, the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid (t44) 100 msec after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off (t43).

As shown in FIG. 8C, in the short opening with V, the same opening as the first opening of the first special variable winning device 38 in the long opening with V is performed (t51 to t54), and the opening is completed. The round ends based on (t54). Since the first special variable winning device 38 is opened for a very short time and the lever solenoid 38f is also turned on for a short time, it is unlikely that the game ball will flow into the specific region. Therefore, it is rare that a high probability state occurs when the jackpot type is normal.

The operation of the lever solenoid 38f and the activation / invalidation of the specific area switch 38d are performed in the same manner as in the case of long opening with V as long as the game ball remains in the first special variable winning device 38 ( t55-t63). Therefore, if the game ball remains in the first special variable winning device 38 even after the processing time of the remaining ball of the upper prize opening has elapsed, the lever solenoid 38f is in the OFF state when the discharge of the remaining ball is completed. The operation is terminated, and the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid. If all the game balls are not discharged by the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t62), the lever solenoid 38f is turned off at the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t62). The specific area switch 38d becomes invalid (t63) 100 msec after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off (t62) after the operation is terminated in the state.

Further, the first opening (t31 to t34) of the first special variation winning device 38 in the long opening with V shown in FIG. 8 (b) and the first special variation in the short opening with V shown in FIG. 8 (c). The opening of the winning device 38 (t51 to t54) is set to an opening time such that at least one game ball can be won by the first special variable winning device 38.

As shown in FIG. 8D, in the V-less short opening, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened (t71) with the start of the round, and the openable time of 200 ms elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9 pieces). ), The first special variable winning device 38 is closed to end the round (t72) when any of the conditions for winning the game ball is satisfied. However, since the openable time is short, it is rare that a predetermined number of prizes, which are the closing conditions, occur, and in most cases, the prize is closed as the openable time elapses. After that, the upper prize opening remaining ball processing time is started (t72), the interval time is started when the upper prize winning opening remaining ball processing time ends (t73), and the next round is started when the interval time ends (t74). ). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

Further, FIG. 7D shows an opening mode in the second special gaming state (special gaming state based on small hits). In the second special game state, first, the small hit fanfare time is started, and when the small hit fanfare time ends, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened, and the openable time of 1600 msec elapses or a predetermined number (for example). The second special variable winning device 39 is closed when any of the conditions for winning the 9) game balls is satisfied. After that, the small hit remaining ball processing time is started, and when the small hit remaining ball processing time ends, the small hit ending time starts, and when the small hit ending time ends, the second special gaming state ends. In addition, there may be a plurality of types of opening / closing modes (opening time and number of opening times) in the second special game state, and in that case, for example, it is determined which opening / closing mode is set (adopted) based on the small hit symbol. ..

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Next, the transition (transition) of the game state by the game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing a game state transition in the present embodiment.
The gaming state includes a normal gaming state ST1, a first specific gaming state ST2, and a second specific gaming state ST3. In addition to this, as special game states, there are a first special game state based on the first special result (big hit) and a second special game state based on the second special result (small hit), but they are omitted here. In each game state, the special figure probability from which the first special result to be controlled by the game control device 100 is derived, the effect mode controlled by the effect control device 300 to determine the effect mode of the game, and the main in the game state. The main starting area, which is the starting area to be aimed at, the main variable special map, which is the type of special figure variation display game to be mainly executed, and the launch direction of the game ball are defined.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to aim for a prize in the starting winning opening 36 by hitting the left side, and aiming for a prize in the ordinary variable winning device 37 by hitting the right side. That is, it is possible to select the target starting area according to the player's will. Further, each game state is designed on the assumption that one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is mainly played, and the player plays the game according to this design. It is configured so that it is advantageous for the player to proceed mainly with the special figure variation display game, which is determined to be the main in the design so as to proceed. In the following description, one special figure variation display game determined to be the main in each game state may be referred to as a main variation, and the other special figure variation display game may be referred to as an irregular variation.

In the normal game state ST1, the special figure probability is low, and there is no general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and the special figure variable display game or normal Figure Fluctuation display There is no time saving to shorten the fluctuation time of the game. In addition, the effect mode that defines the effect mode is a normal mode. The main variable special figure is a special figure 1 variable display game, and the main starting area is the starting winning opening 36, and the firing direction is left-handed in order to aim at the starting winning opening 36. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variable display game is the irregular variation. In this normal game state ST1, a very long fluctuation time is set for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes inefficient in terms of time, and the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at the acquisition of a small hit in the normal game state ST1. ..

In the second specific game state ST3, the special figure probability is basically a low probability state. However, in the special game state based on the normal jackpot, when the game ball flows into the specific area (probability variation operation area) of the first special variable winning device 38 (when there is V passage), the probability state is high. In addition, there is a general electric support that facilitates winning by improving the opening time per unit time of the ordinary variable winning device 37. If there is Fuden support, it will be possible to shorten the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game and the normal map fluctuation display game. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is the chance mode. Further, the main variable special figure is a special figure 2 variable display game, the main starting area is the normal variable winning device 37, and the firing direction is right-handed in order to aim at the normal variable winning device 37. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 2 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 1 variable display game is the irregular variation.

In the first specific game state ST2, the special figure probability is a high probability state, and there is no general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and the special figure changing display game. There is a certain amount of time to shorten the fluctuation time of. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is a small hit RUSH. Further, the main variable special figure is a special figure 2 variable display game, the main starting area is the normal variable winning device 37, and the firing direction is right-handed in order to aim at the normal variable winning device 37. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 2 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 1 variable display game is the irregular variation.

In this embodiment, the probability of winning the normal map fluctuation display game in the state with the normal power support (normal probability) is the same as the probability (normal probability) in the state without the normal power support. In a state where there is a normal power support, the normal probability can be set to a higher probability (high probability state of the normal figure) than the normal probability (low probability state of the normal figure).
Further, in the present embodiment, the state without the normal electric support means that the normal variable winning device 37 is opened, but the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 is shorter than the state with the normal electric support. is there.

In the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is shortened as compared with the case of the normal game state ST1, and the normal variation winning device 37 is hit right. It is advantageous for the player to play the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at. The special figure 2 variable display game has a higher probability of a small hit than the special figure 1 variable display game (in the case of this embodiment, the small hit probability of the special figure 1 is 0), and the small hit is won more than the big hit. Since there is a high probability that the game will occur, small hits occur frequently in the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3.
When the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a small hit in the second specific game state ST3, the state in which the normal electric support is provided continues even in the special game state based on the small hit, and in the first specific game state ST2. If the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the state without the normal electric support continues even in the special game state based on the small hit. Further, in the special gaming state based on the small hit, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened, but the first special variable winning device 38 is not opened (see FIG. 7D).

Therefore, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit in the second specific game state ST3, most of the right-handed game balls in the special game state based on the small hit are normally variable prizes. The device 37 is won, and does not flow down to the second special variable winning device 39 arranged below the normal variable winning device 37. Therefore, in the second specific gaming state ST3, small hits occur frequently, but it is difficult to increase the number of balls held by the player due to the small hits.
On the other hand, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit in the first specific game state ST2, most of the right-handed game balls in the special game state based on the small hit are normally variable prizes. Instead of winning the device 37, the game flows down to the second special variable winning device 39 arranged below the normal variable winning device 37. Therefore, in the first specific game state ST2, it is easy to increase the number of game balls of the player by a small hit. That is, in the first specific game state ST2, small hits occur frequently and the number of balls held by the player increases. Therefore, the effect mode is a mode called small hit RUSH.

Of these three gaming states, the normal gaming state ST1 is the most disadvantageous state for the player. The second specific game state ST3 is a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state ST1 because it has a general electric support. The first specific game state ST2 is a high-probability state, and further, the player's ball possession increases due to the frequent occurrence of small hits. Therefore, the player has a higher probability than the normal game state ST1 and the second specific game state ST3. It is in an advantageous state.

The transition of the game state is performed by ending the first special game state based on the derivation of the first special result, exhausting the specified number of games, and winning the fall lottery which is the transition lottery to the low probability state. .. Basically, the probability variation jackpot is derived to enter the first special gaming state, and in the first special gaming state, the game ball flows into the specific area (probability variation operation area) of the first special variation winning device 38 and the specific area switch. When it is detected in 38d (when V is passed), it shifts to the first specific gaming state ST2 after the end of the first special gaming state. On the other hand, when the probability variation jackpot is derived to enter the first special gaming state, and the game ball does not flow into the specific area (probability variation operation region) of the first special variation winning device 38 in the first special gaming state (no V passage). In the case of), the normal gaming state ST1 is entered after the end of the first special gaming state. In addition, when a normal jackpot is derived to enter the first special gaming state and there is no V passage in the first special gaming state, the second specific gaming state ST3 (special figure low probability) after the end of the first special gaming state. It shifts to the second specific game state ST3). On the other hand, when a normal jackpot is derived to enter the first special gaming state and there is a V passage in the first special gaming state, the second specific gaming state ST3 (special figure high probability) after the end of the first special gaming state. It shifts to the second specific game state ST3).
Further, when the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times (the number of times of support) from the end of the special game state in the second specific game state ST3, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1. Further, when the fall lottery is won in the first specific game state ST2, the process shifts to the normal game state ST1.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game. Further, when the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a decorative special figure variable display game. When the big hit (first special result) and the small hit (second special result) are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a hit (special result). When the first special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a big hit, and the second special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a small hit, are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a special gaming state.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is performed by launching a gaming ball (pachinko ball) toward the gaming area 32 from a hitting ball launching device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the normal drawing start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35. , The starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, or the game area flows into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32. It is discharged from 32. Then, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38, or the second special variable winning device 39, the number according to the type of winning opening. The prize ball is discharged from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player adjusts the firing force and launches a gaming ball into the left gaming area (so-called left-handed) to move the starting winning opening 36 or the starting winning opening 36 to the left. It is possible to aim for a prize in the arranged general winning opening 35, and by launching a game ball into the right gaming area (so-called right-handed), the normal figure starting gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, and the first special variable winning It is possible to aim for a prize in the device 38, the second special variable winning device 39, and the general winning opening 35 arranged on the right side of the second special variable winning device 39.

A gate switch 34a including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 is provided in the normal drawing start gate 34, and is driven into the game area 32. When the game ball passes through the start gate 34 of the normal drawing, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the number of normal figure start memories is an upper limit number (for example, 4) based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure start gate 34. If it is less than), the number of normal figure start memories is added (+1) and one normal figure start memory is stored in ROM 111B. The number of stored numbers of the winnings for starting the normal drawing is displayed on the general drawing holding display 56 of the batch display device 50. In addition, the hit determination random value (hit random value) for determining the result of the normal map variation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a is stored in the normal map start memory. It is supposed to be done.

Then, when there is a memory of starting the normal map and the normal variable display game can be started, that is, the normal variable display game is hit and the normal variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, that is, the normal map variable display game is not being executed. If it is not in the hit state, the hit judgment random value stored in the first stored normal map start memory is compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit / miss of the normal map variation display game. Then, the process of starting the normal map variation display game is performed. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the normal map variation display game becomes a hit and a specific result mode (normal map specific result) is derived.

Further, the game control device 100 predetermines a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns over a predetermined fluctuation time in the normal map display unit 58 provided in the batch display device 50 as a process of executing the normal map variation display game. After performing the display during the fluctuation of the normal map, which is repeatedly displayed in the order given, the process of displaying the variable display game of the normal map, which stops and displays the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result, is performed. It should be noted that the normal drawing display unit 58 is composed of the display device 41, and for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc. are used as ordinary identification information, and after displaying the fluctuations for a predetermined time, the display is stopped and the result is displayed. It may be configured.

When the result of the normal fluctuation display game is a hit, the lighting pattern, which is a special result mode, is stopped and displayed on the normal figure display unit 58, and the normal variable winning device 37 is operated by operating the normal electric solenoid 37c. Control is performed to open the device for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds). That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member). If the result of the normal map variation display game is out of alignment, the normal map display unit 58 is controlled to display a lighting pattern that is the result of the deviation.

Further, the winning ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the winning ball to the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a, respectively, which are provided inside. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the first start memory that forms the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning of the start winning opening 36 is limited to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). In addition to storing, the second start memory that forms the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). Based on the winning of the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, the jackpot random number value, the jackpot symbol random value, and each variable pattern random value are extracted as the starting memory information, respectively. The numerical value is stored in the RAM 111B as the first start memory and the second start memory. Then, the stored number of the start memory is the first storage display unit 53 (special figure 1 hold display) and the second memory display unit 54 (special figure 2 hold display) for notifying the start winning number of the batch display device 50. Is also displayed on the display device 41 of the center case 40 as a decorative special drawing start memory display.

The game control device 100 plays a special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 (first variation display device) based on the first start memory, and the special figure 2 display 52 (1st variation display device) is based on the second start memory. The special figure 2 variable display game is played on the second variable display device). The special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, but while one special figure variable display game is being executed, the other special figure variable display game becomes the first special result (big hit). In that case, one of the special figure variation display games is terminated as a result other than the special result (missing result). In addition, if the other special figure variation display game has a second special result (small hit) during the execution of one special figure variation display game, the one is concerned until the end of the special gaming state based on the small hit. The special figure fluctuation display game of is interrupted.

That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 executes the special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 36 (first start winning area). It serves as a first execution control means for controlling. Further, the game control device (game control means) 100 is a special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning area). It serves as a second execution control means for performing execution control.

In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, after performing the variable display, a predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. When the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes a special result mode (big hit result mode) corresponding to the first special result. It becomes a big hit and becomes the first special game state (so-called big hit state). Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 corresponds to the second special result (small hit result mode). Then, it becomes a small hit and becomes a second special game state (so-called small hit state). That is, the special figure 1 display 51 serves as a first variable display means capable of displaying the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36. Further, the special figure 2 display 52 serves as a second variable display means capable of displaying the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37.

Further, after the end of the big hit game state (first special game state), the game control device (game control means) 100 is in a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (the probability of hitting is high and the probability of hitting is high). It is possible to control to generate a gaming state (specific gaming state) in which the game can proceed by (with support). That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 forms the specific game state generating means.

Further, in response to the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, the decorative special figure variation in which a plurality of types of decorative identification information (numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc.) are variablely displayed on the display device 41. The display game is now running. The decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41 includes a decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and a decorative special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game. Yes, these are displayed in separate display areas. Then, the variation display is performed according to the variation of the corresponding special figure variation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed according to the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special figure variation display game.

That is, the display device 41 changes the decoration identification information in accordance with the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) and the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). It serves as a decorative variation display means that can display a decorative special figure variation display game). It should be noted that different display devices may be used for the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, or only one of the decorative special figure variable display games may be displayed. Further, the game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the probability of a small hit is higher in the special figure 2 variable display game (the probability of a small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game is 0), but it is special in the normal gaming state. FIG. 2 Fluctuation display A long variation with a very long variation time (about 10 minutes) is selected as the variation pattern of the game. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes inefficient in terms of time in the normal game state, and the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at the acquisition of a small hit in the normal game state. I have to. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is advantageous for the player to hit the left side to aim at the start winning opening 36 and play the special figure 1 variable display game.
The length variation time is about 10 minutes, but it may be longer or shorter (5 minutes, 50 minutes, 10 hours, etc.). Further, the time of the long fluctuation may be different depending on the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. Specifically, for example, when the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is out of order or a small hit, a long variation with a variation time of about 10 minutes is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game. When the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit, a long variation with a variation time of about 5 minutes may be selected as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 12 performed in a predetermined time period (for example, 4 ms).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 10, first, a process for disabling interrupts (step X1) is performed, and then a stack pointer, which is the start address of an area for saving the value of a register or the like when an interrupt occurs. The stack pointer setting process (step X2) for setting is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step X3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X4). In the case of the present embodiment, the range of the RAM address is 0000h to 01FFh, 00h or 01h is taken as the upper rank, and the first 00h is set in step X4. Next, the launch stop signal is output and the launch permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step X5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a launch stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 152 are read (step X6), and a process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7) is performed. In the process of step X7, by setting a predetermined initial value, a slave control means (for example, a payout control device 200 or an effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to instructions from the game control device 100 that forms the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program to start normally is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can avoid missing commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Further, the power-on delay timer is timed by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to the validity judgment) that is not subject to the validity judgment (checksum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of power-on from becoming complicated.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X8), and if a power failure has occurred (step X8; Y), the power of the gaming machine is supplied. Wait for it to be blocked.
Specifically, in step X8, for example, the number of times (for example, twice) that the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set, and the power failure monitoring signal is turned on. Determine if there is any. Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is on, it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the set number of checks. Then, if the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks, the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. If the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the number of checks, it is determined that a power failure has occurred. The same applies to steps X34 and X54 described later. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when a power failure has not occurred (step X8; N), the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X9), and it is determined whether the timer value is 0 (step X10). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step X10; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of determining whether a power failure has occurred (step X8). Further, when the value of the timer is 0 (step X10; Y), that is, when the standby time has expired, access permission is given to the read-write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM (step). X11), output off-data to all output ports (set to no output) (step X12).

Next, a serial port (a port previously mounted on the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in the present embodiment) is set (step X13), and the game microcomputer. A process (step X14) for activating a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator has a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) with respect to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. It also includes a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.
Next, the RAM error flag is set (step X15). Here, on the premise that there is an abnormality in the RAM regardless of whether or not there is an abnormality in the RAM, the RAM abnormality flag is temporarily set in a predetermined register.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step X16), and if it is normal (step X16; Y), the power failure inspection in the RWM. It is determined whether the value of the area 2 is the normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step X17). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X17; Y), the checksum calculation process (step X18) for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed, and the calculated checksum and the power are turned off. It is determined whether the checksums of are matched (step X19). If the checksums match (step X19; Y), the RAM error flag is cleared (step X20) because there is no abnormality in the RAM, and the process proceeds to step X21.

If it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X16; N or step X17; N), and if it is determined that the checksums do not match (step X19; N), the step. Based on the state read by X6, it is determined whether both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the ON state (step X21). Then, when at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the off state (step X21; N), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22). When the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22; Y), since there is an abnormality in the RAM, the effect control board (effect control) issues a main abnormality error notification command for notifying that the game control device 100 is abnormal. It is transmitted to the device 300) (step X24).

On the other hand, when the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X22; N), it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23). Then, when the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23; Y), the main abnormality error notification command is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X24). The probability setting flag set here is the probability setting flag set before the occurrence of a power failure. That is, if the power of the gaming machine is cut off and restarted while the probability set value is being changed, the operation of the gaming control device 100 is stopped, so the process of step X24 is performed.
Next, the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped is output to the fifth driver 138e via the second output port 134 (step X25). As a result, the performance display device 153 performs the display as shown in FIG. 14 (h). After that, the on-data of the security signal is output and the off-data of the signal other than the security signal is output (step X26), and the process returns to step X25.

Further, when both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the ON state (step X21; Y), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27). Then, when the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X27; N), the probability setting changing flag is set (step X29). As a result, the mode shifts to the probability setting value change mode. After that, the command for which the probability setting is being changed is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X30), and the process proceeds to step X31. Based on receiving the command during the probability setting change, the effect control device 300 displays the display device 41, emits light from the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, operates the board effect device 44, and speakers 19a and 19b. Notifies that the probability setting value is being changed by outputting voice from the user.
On the other hand, when the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27; Y), the process of clearing the probability set value (step X28) is performed. As a result, 0 is set in the area for the probability setting value in the RWM, and the probability setting value becomes “setting 1”. After that, the processes of steps X29 and X30 are performed, and the process proceeds to step X31.

Further, when at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the off state (step X21; N), and neither the RAM abnormality flag nor the probability setting changing flag is set (Tep X22; N and step X23). In N), it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is in the ON state based on the state read in step X6 (step X35). Then, when the setting key switch 152 is not in the ON state (step X35; N), it is determined whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the ON state based on the state read in step X6 (step X43).

When it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is not in the ON state (step X43; N), that is, when both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the OFF state, the process proceeds to step X41 and the power failure occurs. Performs processing when it recovers normally.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the ON state (step X43; Y), the process proceeds to step X44 to perform initialization processing. That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 serves as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make a means of conversion.

When the setting key switch 152 is in the ON state (step X35; Y), the probability setting checking flag is set (step X36). As a result, the mode shifts to the probability setting value confirmation mode. After that, the command for which the probability setting is being confirmed is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X37). Based on receiving the command during the probability setting confirmation, the effect control device 300 displays the display device 41, emits light from the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, operates the board effect device 44, and speakers 19a and 19b. Notifies that the probability setting value is being confirmed by outputting the voice by.

Then, in order to guarantee the output of the security signal for 50 msec or longer, the value corresponding to 128 msec is saved in the security signal control timer area (step X31). The security signal is output in the probability setting change / confirmation process (step X123) of the timer interrupt process in the probability setting value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode, and in other cases, the external information editing of the timer interrupt process is edited. It is output in the process (step X120). Therefore, when the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode ends in less than 128 msec, the security signal is continuously output by the external information editing process (step X120) of the timer interrupt process. That is, even if the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode ends in less than 128 msec, the security signal is output for 128 msec after shifting to the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode. To. The value saved in the security signal control timer area in step X31 is not limited to the value corresponding to 128 ms. However, since it is necessary to output the security signal for at least 50 msec after shifting to the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode, it is necessary to save the value corresponding to 50 msec or more.

Then, the interrupt is permitted (step X32), and it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is in the off state (step X33). In step X33, the determination is not made based on the state read in step X6 (state at power-on), but the state read in the input process (step X103) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) (current state). Judge based on. When it is determined in step X33 that the setting key switch 152 is in the off state, the probability setting value is determined.
If the setting key switch 152 is not in the off state (step X33; N), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X34), and if no power failure has occurred (step X34; N), step X33 is performed. Return, and if a power failure has occurred (step X34; Y), the process proceeds to step X55. When it is determined in step X34 that a power failure has occurred while the probability setting changing flag is set, in step X23 of the main process (FIGS. 10 and 11) after the power failure is restored. It is determined that the probability setting changing flag is set.

On the other hand, when the setting key switch 152 is in the off state (step X33; Y), a process for disabling interrupts (step X38) is performed. The timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) is performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 ms) from the process of enabling interrupts (step X32) to the process of disabling interrupts (steps X38 and X55). .. In the timer interrupt process, the probability setting change / confirmation process (step X123), which is a process related to the probability set value, is performed. That is, the main process is on standby until the change or confirmation of the probability set value is completed (or until a power failure occurs).
Next, a command to end the notification is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X39). Based on receiving the notification end command, the effect control device 300 ends the execution notification (notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed or notification indicating that the probability setting value is being confirmed). ..

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40), and when the probability setting changing flag is not set (step X40; N), that is, when the probability setting checking flag is set. Performs a power failure recovery process (step X41) that saves an initial value at the time of power failure recovery in an area to be initialized (for example, a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring). The probability setting checking flag is cleared in this step X41.
After that, the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure game processing number is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X42), and the process proceeds to step X47. In the case of the present embodiment, in step X42, a plurality of model designation commands, probability setting information commands, special figure 1 hold number commands, special figure 2 hold number commands, probability information commands, effect count information commands, screen designation commands, and the like. Send a command. As the screen designation command, if both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are in the normal processing described later, that is, if the special figure variation display game is not being executed and the special game state is not in progress, the command is waiting for a customer. Send the command of the customer waiting demo screen, otherwise send the command of the recovery screen. In addition to these commands, a high-probability number-of-times information command or the like is also transmitted depending on the model.

On the other hand, when the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40; Y), the RAM area other than the probability setting value is cleared to 0 (step X44). In step X44, the RAM area for the probability set value (work area (1 byte area of the probability set value)) and the RAM area for performance display (display of base value and accessory ratio) (work area and stack area) are cleared. Instead, the game control RAM area (work area and stack area) is cleared to 0. Therefore, the probability setting changing flag is cleared in this step X44. In step X44, the stack area and the unused area may or may not be cleared.

Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step X45). The area to be initialized here is a customer waiting demo area and an area related to the setting of the production mode. Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X46). In the case of this embodiment, in step X46, a model designation command, a probability setting information command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, an effect number information command, and a RAM initialization command (waiting for customers). Along with displaying the demo screen, a plurality of commands such as a command for notifying the RAM initialization by light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) are transmitted. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a production count information command and a support count information command, which is information on the number of executions of the special figure variation display game with normal power support, are also transmitted.

Next, a process of starting and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step X47). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before the upper bit transposition) in a predetermined order and storing them as different bit arrangements (arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that determines. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, the values of the predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of turning on the power are extracted, and the corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, the random numbers that determine the hit symbol of the special figure). RWM as the initial value (start value) of (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), random number that determines the hit of the normal figure (win random number), random number that determines whether or not to win the fall lottery (fall lottery random number)) After saving in the predetermined area of (step X48), the interrupt is permitted (step X49). In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the initial value random number update process (step X50) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the fall lottery random number are generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. It is configured as follows. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the CPU operating clock, and the jackpot symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, and fall lottery random number are processed by the program. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing which is a unit. In addition, in the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the fall lottery random number, the so-called "initial value change method" in which the start value is changed by using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number goes around. "Is adopted. It should be noted that each of the random numbers is a continuous numerical value in a predetermined range, and the update method may be a counter-type update by +1 or -1, and all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. It may be a random expression update. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the fall lottery random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.
In this embodiment, since a random number (hit symbol random number) for determining the hit symbol of the normal figure is not provided, there is only one type of hit symbol of the normal figure, but a hit symbol random number is provided and the hit symbol of the normal figure is provided. May be selected from a plurality of types.

After the initial value random number update process in step X50, a process for disabling interrupts (step X51) is performed, and a performance display editing process (step X52) is performed. Then, after performing the process of permitting the interrupt (step X53), it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred (step X54), and if no power failure has occurred (step X54; N), the initial value random number update process is performed. Return to (step X50). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process, the performance display editing process, and the power failure monitoring are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step X50) (step X49), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process will be executed with priority, and the timer interrupt will be executed. It is possible to prevent the interrupt processing from being overwhelmed by waiting for the initial value random number update processing.

In the initial value random number update process in step X50, in addition to the main process, there is also a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process. In order to avoid executing the random number update process, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to release the interrupt. If the initial value random number update processing is not performed in the timer interrupt processing and only in the main processing, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update processing, which simplifies the main processing. There is an advantage that it is converted.

On the other hand, when a power failure occurs (step X54; Y), a process of temporarily disabling interrupts (step X55) and a process of outputting off-data to all output ports (step X56) are performed.
After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step X57), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step X58). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step X59) for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off and a process (step X60) for saving the calculated checksum, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step X61). ), And then wait for the power of the gaming machine to be turned off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, a main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game and a sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to instructions from the main control means, etc. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control device) that delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.
Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, in the main control means (game control device 100), the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) capable of being operated from the outside, and the initialization operation unit are operated. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C is provided based on the above, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.
Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to allow access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. That is, it is an interrupt routine that is started in a predetermined cycle. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 12 is started.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, the register bank 1 is specified (step X101). By switching to the register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, the D register) (step X102). In step X102, the same processing as in step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register banks are different. Next, input from various sensors and switches and signal acquisition, that is, input processing (step X103) for reading the state of each input port is performed.

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104), and when the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104; Y). , The probability setting change / confirmation process (step X123) is performed, and the timer interrupt process is terminated.
On the other hand, when both the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting checking flag are not set (step X104; N), the solenoids (large winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b) are based on the output data set in various processes. , Lever solenoid 38f, Fuden solenoid 37c) and other actuators are subjected to output processing (step X105) for driving control and the like. When the firing stop signal is output in step X5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, the signal is not processed. Further, the launch permission signal is the first signal indicating the launch permission status as seen from the game control device, and the second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the launch permission status as seen from the payout control device is also payout control. It is generated in the device and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready for launch.

Next, the payout command transmission process (step X106), the random number update process 1 (step X107), and the random number update process 2 (step X108) for outputting the commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 are performed. After that, monitoring whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switches 38a, 39a, setting the prize ball, the front frame and the glass The winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step X109) for opening the frame and monitoring errors such as illegal winning of the normal variable winning device 37 and the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110). Abnormal discharge means that the number of game balls discharged from the first special variable winning device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e) in the first special variable winning device 38 is The number of game balls that have flowed into the first special variable winning device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the large winning opening switch 38a) is exceeded. If an abnormal discharge is occurring, the abnormal discharge flag is set. Then, when an abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110; Y), the process proceeds to step X116. That is, the game is prevented from progressing.

On the other hand, when the abnormal discharge is not occurring (step X110; N), the start port switch monitoring process (step X111) for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37. Then, special figure 1 game processing (step X112) for performing processing related to the special figure 1 variable display game, special figure 2 game processing (step X113) for performing processing related to the special figure 2 variable display game, and processing related to the normal figure variable display game are performed. Performs the normal map game process (step X114), and drives the segment LED provided on the gaming machine 10 to display the display of the special figure variation display game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents. The editing process (step X115) is performed.

Next, a magnet fraud monitoring process (step X116) that checks the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 and determines whether or not there is an abnormality, and a process that checks the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 and determines whether or not there is an abnormality. Radio fraud monitoring process (step X117), vibration fraud monitoring process (step X118) that checks the detection signal from the vibration sensor 65 to determine if there is any abnormality, and determines whether abnormal discharge has occurred. Perform the abnormal discharge monitoring process (step X119). Further, external information editing process (step X120) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer, game machine status command transmission processing (step X121) for setting commands related to errors generated in the game machine, and performance display. The performance display monitor control process (step X122) related to the control of the device 153 is performed, and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting interrupts) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) are interrupt return processes. It is automatically performed at the time (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Depending on the CPU used, some gaming machines need to be instructed to execute a process of restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process of restoring the register bank designation.

[Probability setting change / confirmation process]
FIG. 13 shows the probability setting change / confirmation process (step X123) in the timer interrupt process described above. In this probability setting change / confirmation process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is within the normal range (range 0 to 5 in this embodiment) (step X131).
When the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is within the normal range (step X131; Y), the probability setting corresponding to the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM (current probability setting value). The value display data is set (step X132), and the probability set value display data is output to the fifth driver 138e via the second output port 134 (step X134). As a result, in the performance display device 153, the display as shown in FIGS. 14A to 14F is performed.
On the other hand, when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is not within the normal range (step X131; N), the extinguishing data is set as the probability setting value display data (step X133), and the probability setting value is displayed. The data is output to the fifth driver 138e via the second output port 134 (step X134). As a result, the performance display device 153 displays as shown in FIG. 14 (g).

As shown in FIG. 14, the performance display device 153 is composed of four 7-segment displays (7-segment type displays) arranged side by side. In the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode, the current probability setting value is shown on the rightmost 7-segment display among these four 7-segment displays, and "SET" is displayed on the remaining 7-segment display. "Is supposed to indicate the character.
Specifically, when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "0", the current probability setting value is "setting 1", so 7 at the right end as shown in FIG. 14 (a). When "1" is displayed on the seg display and the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "1", the current probability setting value is "setting 2", so FIG. 14 (b) shows. As shown, when "2" is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display and the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "2", the current probability setting value is "setting 3". As shown in FIG. 14 (c), when "3" is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display and the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "3", the current probability setting value is "set". Since it is "4", "4" is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display as shown in FIG. 14 (d), and when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "4", the current value is "4". Since the probability setting value is "setting 5", "5" is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display as shown in FIG. 14 (e), and the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "5". In the case of, since the current probability setting value is “setting 6”, “6” is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display as shown in FIG. 14 (f). When the value in the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is out of the normal range (abnormal value), the rightmost 7-segment display is turned off as shown in FIG. 14 (g).
For example, when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "0", the probability setting value display data is "1" in the first digit, "T" in the second digit, and "T" in the third digit. The probability set value display data instructing to display "E" and "S" in the fourth digit is output to the fifth driver 138e.

Next, if the security signal control timer is not "0", the security signal control timer is updated by -1 (step X135). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set in step X31 of the main process, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0".
Next, the on-data of the security signal is output and the off-data of the signal other than the security signal is output (step X136). In step X136, the on-data of the security signal is output regardless of whether or not the security signal control timer is timed up. Therefore, the security signal will continue to be output during the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode (while the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting confirmation flag is set).

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (step X137), and when the probability setting changing flag is not set (step X137; N), that is, when the probability setting checking flag is set. Ends the probability setting change / confirmation process. On the other hand, when the probability setting changing flag is set (step X137; Y), the probability setting change / confirmation process during execution is the probability setting change / confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. It is determined whether it is a confirmation process (step X138).

If it is the probability setting change / confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (step X138; Y), the probability setting change / confirmation process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not the probability setting change / confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (step X138; N), it is determined whether there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139). In step X139, when an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 is detected in the immediately preceding input process (step X103), it is determined that there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112. If there is no input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139; N), the probability setting change / confirmation process ends.

On the other hand, when there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139; Y), that is, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is newly operated, the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is 0 to 0. Update +1 in the range of 5 (step X140), and end the probability setting change / confirmation process. The value updated in step X140 (probability setting value after update) is displayed on the performance display device 153 by the next probability setting change / confirmation process.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6A, “setting 1” to “setting 6” are used for three types of probability values (probability value in a low probability state and probability value in a high probability state). However, for example, "setting 1" to "setting 3" may be assigned to three types of probability values (probability value in a low probability state and probability value in a high probability state). In this case, in step X140, the value of the region for the probability setting value of RWM is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 2.

By operating the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the mode can be shifted to the probability setting value change mode, and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be operated during the probability setting value change mode. You can change the probability setting value with.
Since the RAM initialization switch 112 can only perform a pressing operation, it is not possible to distinguish between a transition operation for shifting to the probability set value change mode and a change operation for changing the probability set value. Therefore, when the transition operation (the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 that caused the transition to the probability setting value change mode) continues even during the probability setting value change mode, that is, the RAM initialization switch is started from the time the power is turned on. If 112 is kept pressed, the probability setting value is updated (changed) according to the operation even though the operation is a transition operation.

Specifically, in the input process (step X103) of the timer interrupt process, the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 read in the previous input process is off, and the RAM initialization switch 112 read in the current input process is in the off state. When the state is on, the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 is detected. In the input process (step X103) in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on, the input process immediately before the power is turned off is the previous input process, and the input process immediately after the power is turned on is the current input process. There is a high possibility that the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 read by the process is the off state. That is, if the transition operation continues even during the probability set value change mode, the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 in the input process (step X103) in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on. ) Is likely to be detected. Therefore, in this case, if the processing of steps X139 and 140 is performed in the probability setting change / confirmation processing in the first timer interrupt processing after the power is turned on, it is determined that there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 based on the transition operation. There may be a problem that the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is updated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to avoid such inconvenience, the process of step X138 is performed, and the process of steps X139 and X140 is not performed in the probability setting change / confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on. I will do it. As a result, regarding the update (change) of the probability setting value, the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 that has continued since the power was turned on (that is, the RAM initialization switch 112 that caused the transition to the probability setting value change mode). Since the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of) is ignored, it is possible to prevent an unintended update.

From the above, the game machine 10 of the present embodiment is the first game machine capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) becomes a special result. A storage means for storing one of a plurality of probability setting values to which the operation unit (setting key operation unit) and the second operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) and the probability values used for the lottery of the game are assigned. (Game control device 100 (RAM111C)) and a mode for shifting to a probability setting value change mode in which the probability setting value can be changed in response to the operation of the first operation unit and the second operation unit when the power of the game machine is turned on. In response to the operation of the transition means (game control device 100) and the second operation unit in the probability setting value change mode, the probability setting value stored in the storage means (value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM). ) Is provided with a setting changing means (game control device 100), an operation of the second operation unit (shift operation) for shifting to the probability setting value changing mode, and a second for changing the probability setting value. The operation (change operation) of the operation unit is the same operation (pressing operation in the case of this embodiment), and the setting changing means continues from the time when the power of the game machine is turned on even in the probability setting value changing mode. It is configured not to respond to the operation of the second operation unit.
Therefore, if the operation (transition operation) of the second operation unit performed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on continues even after the transition to the probability setting value change mode, the probability setting value is not changed during that time, which is not intended. It is possible to prevent the change of the probability set value.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
FIG. 15 shows a start port switch monitoring process (step X111) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process. In this start port switch monitoring process, first, a start port 1 (start winning opening 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step X491), and a hard random number acquisition process (step X492) is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not there is information with a start opening prize that is set when a big hit random number is acquired based on the winning of the start winning opening 36 in the hard random number acquisition process (step X493).

If the starting opening winning information is not set based on the winning of the starting winning opening 36 (step X493; N), the process proceeds to step X499. In this case, information on no starting opening prize is set.
On the other hand, when the information with the starting opening winning is set based on the winning of the starting winning opening 36 (step X493; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure has a low probability and no time reduction (normal game state). (Step X494). Then, when the special figure has a low probability and no time reduction is in progress (step X494; Y), the process proceeds to step X497. Further, when the special figure has a low probability and the time is not shortened (step X494; N), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step X495), and an effect command setting process (step X496) is performed.

Based on the reception of the right-handed instruction notification command, the effect control device 300 performs a right-handed instruction notification instructing the player to perform a right-handed hit by display, voice, or the like. Right-handed is more advantageous for the player when in the specific game state or special game state, and the start winning opening 36, which is designed so that the player cannot win unless the player is left-handed, is in the specific game state or special game state. When a prize is detected inside, a right-handed instruction is notified.

Then, a table for setting the information of the hold by the start port 1 is prepared (step X497), and the special figure start port switch common process (step X498) is performed. Next, the starting port 2 (ordinary variable winning device 37) winning monitoring table was prepared (step X499), a hard random number acquisition process (step X500) was performed, and a jackpot random number was acquired based on the winning of the ordinary variable winning device 37. It is determined whether or not there is information on the starting opening winning that is set in the case (step X501).

If the starting port winning information is not set based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 (step X501; N), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated. In this case, information on no starting opening prize is set.
On the other hand, when the start port winning information is set based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 (step X501; Y), the normal electric (normal variable winning device 37) is operating, that is, normal. It is determined whether or not the variable winning device 37 is operating to open the game ball in an open state (step X502), and if the normal power is operating (step X502; Y), the process proceeds to step X504. Transition. On the other hand, when the normal electric power is not operating (step X502; N), it is determined whether or not the general electric power is being illegally generated (step X503).

In the determination of whether or not a fraudulent occurrence is occurring, it is determined that fraudulent occurrence is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings in the ordinary variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5). In the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or fraud has occurred, and if there is a game ball that wins in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent prizes. Then, when the number of fraudulent winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of fraud occurrence determinations (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

If an illegal operation is occurring (step X503; Y), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is prevented from being generated any more. Further, when the fraudulent electric power is not occurring (step X503; N), a table for setting the information of the hold by the start port 2 is prepared (step X504), and the special figure start port switch common process (step X505) is performed. Then, the start port switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
FIG. 16 shows the special figure start port switch common process (steps X498, X505) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process. The special figure start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are input.

In this special figure start port switch common process, first, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, information regarding the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored is sent to the external management device of the gaming machine 10. The start port signal output count, which is the number of outputs, is loaded (step X521), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X522), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step X523).
If the number of outputs does not overflow (step X523; N), the updated value is saved in the start port signal output count area of the RWM (step X524), and the special figure hold (start) corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored is held. It is determined whether the number of memory), that is, the number of special figure hold (start memory) to be updated is less than the upper limit value (here, 4) (step X525). On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step X523; Y), the process proceeds to step X525. Here, the number of outputs can be stored up to 255, but if the number of outputs is stored up to the upper limit, the value is not saved after the update because the loop is looped by +1 update and becomes 0.

Then, when the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step X525; N), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated. On the other hand, when the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit value (step X525; Y), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (the number of special figure 1 hold or the number of special figure 2 hold) is updated by +1. (Step X526), the target start opening winning flag is saved (step X527). Next, the address of the start port switch to be monitored and the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved special figures is calculated (step X528), and the big hit random number prepared by the hard random number acquisition process is saved in the big hit random number storage area of RWM. (Step X529).

After that, the jackpot symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step X530), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X531). Next, the fall lottery random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step X532), and saved in the fall lottery random number storage area of the RWM (step X533).
Next, it is determined whether or not the starting port 2 (normal variable winning device 37) has been won (step X534), and if the starting port 2 has not been won (step X534; N), the process proceeds to step X537. On the other hand, in the case of winning the starting port 2 (step X534; Y), the small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step X535), and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X536). ..

Then, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step X537), and the special figure reservation information determination processing (step X538), which is a look-ahead process, is performed. Next, the start port switch to be monitored and the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number are prepared (step X539), the effect command setting process (step X540) is performed, and the special figure start port switch common process is performed. finish.
That is, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36, and the predetermined random number can be stored up to a predetermined upper limit as the first starting memory. It serves as a starting memory means. Further, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37, and can store the predetermined random number as the second starting memory up to a predetermined upper limit number. 2 Makes a start storage means.

[Special figure reservation information judgment processing]
17 and 18 show the special figure hold information determination process (step X538) in the above-mentioned special figure start port switch common process. The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead process for determining result-related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

In this special figure reservation information determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is being hit (during the first special gaming state) (step X541), and if the jackpot is being hit (step X541; Y), the special figure reservation information determination is made. End the process. On the other hand, when the jackpot is not hit (step X541; N), the start opening winning flag saved in step X527 of the special figure start opening switch common process is checked, and the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36) is won. (Step X542).

If the starting port 1 is won (step X542; Y), the process proceeds to step X544 to perform look-ahead. On the other hand, if the starting port 1 is not won (step X542; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure has a low probability and no time reduction (during a normal gaming state) (step X543). Then, when the special figure low probability & no time reduction is in progress (step X543; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated. That is, in the normal gaming state, a long variation with a very long variation time (about 10 minutes) is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game, but in this case, the look-ahead is not performed. On the other hand, when it is not in the special figure low probability & time saving (step X543; N), it is determined whether the special figure high probability is in (step X544).

If the special figure is not in high probability (step X544; N), the process proceeds to step X548. On the other hand, when the special figure has a high probability (step X544; Y), is the value of the fall lottery random number prepared in step X532 of the special figure start port switch common process within the range of the judgment value of the fall winning? Determine (step X545). Next, the look-ahead fall lottery information command corresponding to the determination result is prepared (step X546), the effect command setting process (step X547) is performed, and the low probability determination flag is prepared (step X548).

Then, a look-ahead jackpot determination process (step X549) is performed to determine whether the jackpot is a jackpot depending on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (big hit low probability determination value). When the determination result is a big hit (step X550; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch is set (step X551), and the preparation is made in step X530 of the special figure start port switch common process. The stop symbol information corresponding to the big hit symbol random number is acquired (step X552), and the process proceeds to step X559. On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step X550; N), the start port winning flag saved in step X527 of the special figure start port switch common process is checked, and the start port 2 (normal variable winning device 37). (Step X553).

If the starting port 2 is not won (step X553; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step X558), and the process proceeds to step X559. On the other hand, in the case of winning the starting port 2 (step X553; Y), the small hit determination process (step X554) of determining whether the big hit random value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. I do. Then, when the determination result is a small hit (step X555; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step X556), and the small hit symbol prepared in step X535 of the special figure start port switch common process is set. The stop symbol information corresponding to the random number is acquired (step X557), and the process proceeds to step X559. On the other hand, when the determination result is not a small hit (step X555; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step X558), and the stop symbol information acquired in step X552 or X557 or set in step X558. The stopped symbol information is saved in the symbol information area (step X559).

After that, a look-ahead stop symbol command (low probability) corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step X560), and the effect command setting process (step X561) is performed.
Next, a high probability determination flag is prepared (step X562), and a look-ahead jackpot determination process (step X563) is performed to determine whether the jackpot is a jackpot based on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (big hit high probability determination value). I do. Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step X564; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch is set (step X565), and in step X530 of the special figure start port switch common process. The stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared jackpot symbol random number is acquired (step X566), and the process proceeds to step X573. On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step X564; N), the start port winning flag saved in step X527 of the special figure start port switch common process is checked, and the start port 2 (normal variable winning device 37). (Step X567).

If the starting port 2 is not won (step X567; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step X572), and the process proceeds to step X573. On the other hand, in the case of winning the starting port 2 (step X567; Y), the small hit determination process (step X568) of determining whether the big hit random value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. I do. Then, when the determination result is a small hit (step X569; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step X570), and the small hit symbol prepared in step X535 of the special figure start port switch common process is set. The stop symbol information corresponding to the random number is acquired (step X571), and the process proceeds to step X573. On the other hand, when the determination result is not a small hit (step X569; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step X572), and it is determined whether or not the special figure is in high probability (step X573).

Then, when the special figure is not in high probability (step X573; N), the process proceeds to step X575. On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability (step X573; Y), the stop symbol information acquired in step X566 or X571 or the stop symbol information acquired in step X571 is set in the symbol information area in which the stop symbol information is saved in step X559. The stop symbol information set in the above is overwritten and saved (step X574). The stop symbol information saved in the symbol information area is used for pre-reading of fluctuation patterns and the like.

Next, a look-ahead stop symbol command (high probability) corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step X575), and the effect command setting process (step X576) is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, each time the special figure reservation information determination process is executed, the result of determination by the jackpot low probability determination value and the result of determination by the jackpot high probability determination value are transmitted to the effect control device 300. Will be done.
Next, the special figure information setting process (step X577) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and the variation pattern setting process (step X578) for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed. I do.
Then, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number indicating the variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step X579), and the effect command setting process (step X580) is performed to determine the special figure hold information. End the process. The special figure information setting process in step X577 and the variation pattern setting process in step X578 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal processing.

By the above processing, the look-ahead fall lottery information command including the lottery result of the fall lottery for the special figure change display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target and the look-ahead stop including the result of the special figure change display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target. A symbol command and a look-ahead fluctuation pattern command including information on the fluctuation pattern in the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory are prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, whether or not the result-related information corresponding to the start memory (whether or not the jackpot probability state shifts from the high probability state to the low probability state (normal probability state)) and whether or not the jackpot or small hit is achieved. , The determination result (pre-reading result) of the variation pattern) can be notified to the effect control device 300 before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory, and is particularly displayed on the display device 41. It is possible to notify the player of the result-related information before the start timing of the special figure variation display game by changing the decoration special figure start memory display to be performed.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination means capable of determining the result of the variation display game and the variation mode information before the start of the variation display game based on the start memory stored in the start storage means. Further, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start storage means before executing the variation display game based on the start memory (for example, determines whether or not a special result is obtained). Make a preliminary judgment means. It should be noted that the time to determine the random number value stored in advance corresponding to the start memory is not only when the start memory occurs but also before the variable display game based on the start memory is played. Good.

[Look-ahead jackpot judgment processing]
FIG. 19 shows the look-ahead jackpot determination process (steps X549, X563) in the above-mentioned special figure reservation information determination process. In this look-ahead jackpot determination process, first, the lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step X581), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step X582). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step X582; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as the determination result (step X587), and the look-ahead jackpot determination process is terminated. In addition, the loss as a judgment result indicates that the lottery for the big hit has been missed.
On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step X582; N), it is determined whether the determination flag is the high probability determination flag (step X583). When the judgment flag is a high probability judgment flag (step X583; Y), the upper limit judgment value in high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step X584), and the value of the target jackpot random number is the upper limit. It is determined whether it is larger than the determination value (step X586). On the other hand, when the determination flag is not the high probability determination flag (step X583; N), that is, when the determination flag is the low probability determination flag, the upper limit determination value in the low probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step X585). ), It is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step X586).

If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step X586; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as the determination result (step X587), and the look-ahead jackpot determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step X586; N), that is, when it is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the determination result (step X588), and the look-ahead jackpot determination process is terminated.

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
FIG. 20 shows the special figure 1 game processing (step X112) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing. In the special figure 1 game process, control of the entire process related to the special figure 1 variable display game and setting of the display of the special figure 1 are performed. In this special figure 1 game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 interruption flag that is set when the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted is set (step Y100). In the special figure 1 variable display game, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes the second special result (small hit) and the second special gaming state is executed during the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game. , Is interrupted during the execution of the second special game state.

If the special figure 1 interruption flag is not set (step Y100; N), that is, if the special figure 1 variation display game is not interrupted, the process proceeds to step Y101, and the subsequent special figure 1 variation display is performed. Perform game-related processing. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 interruption flag is set (step Y100; Y), that is, when the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, the processing related to the special figure 1 variable display game in steps Y101 to Y115 is performed. Instead, the process proceeds to step Y116. As a result, while the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, the special figure 1 variable display game does not proceed (the special figure 1 game processing timer is not updated), and only the variable display continues.

In the processing related to the special figure 1 variable display game, first, the special gaming state executed based on whether the special figure 2 is in the big hit / small hit, that is, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is the big hit or the small hit. It is determined whether it is inside (step Y101). Then, when the big hit / small hit of the special figure 2 is in progress (step Y101; Y), the process proceeds to step Y104. On the other hand, when the big hit / small hit of the special figure 2 is not in progress (step Y101; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process (step Y102) is performed, and the specific area switch monitoring process (step Y103) is performed.

In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the large winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. To monitor and set the large winning opening count command to be transmitted to the production control device 300 based on the winning to the large winning opening, and to close the large winning opening when the specified number of winnings are received in the large winning opening. Is processed. In the special figure 1 game processing, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being a big hit, and the result of the special figure 2 variable display game. Regarding the special game state executed based on the fact that is a big hit or a small hit, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the special figure 2 game process described later.
In the specific area switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d provided in the first special variable winning device 38 is monitored, and the specific area is specified based on the inflow of the game ball into the specific area (probability operating area). Performs the process of setting the area passage flag. Based on the setting of this specific area passage flag, a process for generating a special gaming state is performed.

Next, if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step Y104), and it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y105). Then, when the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y105; N), that is, when the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y116. Further, when the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y105; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the process is branched to the processing corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number. The special figure 1 game sequence branch table to be referred to is set in the register (step Y106). Then, using the table, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number is acquired (step Y107), and the subroutine call by the special figure 1 game processing number is performed (step Y108).

In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "0", the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 variable display game is monitored, and the variable start setting and effect setting of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the special figure 1 variable display game are set. FIG. 1 Special figure 1 for setting information necessary for performing processing during fluctuations Fig. 1 Ordinary processing (step Y109) is performed.
In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "1", the special figure 1 sets the stop display time, sets the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 display processing, and the like. 1 Perform the variable processing (step Y110).
In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, and each big hit type The special figure 1 display processing (step Y111) is performed to set the fanfare time according to the large winning opening opening pattern, set the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like.

In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "3", the opening time of the big winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step Y112).
In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the big winning opening. The large winning opening opening processing (step Y113) for setting the information necessary for performing the remaining ball processing is performed.

In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, the process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, or the special figure 1 The big winning opening remaining ball processing (step Y114) for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit end processing is performed.
In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "6", the special figure 1 jackpot end process (step Y115) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal process (step Y109). I do.

After that, the special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 is prepared (step Y116), the symbol fluctuation control process (step Y117) related to the special figure 1 display 51 is performed, and the lever solenoid is performed. The lever solenoid control process (step Y118) for controlling the operation of 38f is performed, and the special figure 1 game process is completed. This special figure 1 game process performs a process of performing a series of execution control related to the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game).

[Special Figure 2 Game Processing]
21 and 22 show a special figure 2 game process (step X113) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process. In the special figure 2 game process, control of the entire process related to the special figure 2 variable display game and setting of the display of the special figure 2 are performed. The special figure 2 game processing basically performs the same processing as the special figure 1 game processing described above for the special figure 2.

In this special figure 2 game processing, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is in the big hit, that is, in the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being the big hit (step). Y131). Then, when the jackpot in FIG. 1 is in progress (step Y131; Y), the process proceeds to step Y134. Further, when the big hit of the special figure 1 is not performed (step Y131; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process (step Y132) is performed, and the specific area switch monitoring process (step Y133) is performed.

In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the large winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. To monitor and set the large winning opening count command to be transmitted to the production control device 300 based on the winning to the large winning opening, and to close the large winning opening when the specified number of winnings are received in the large winning opening. Is processed. In the special figure 2 game processing, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit, and the special figure 1 variable display is performed. Regarding the special game state executed based on the result of the game being a big hit, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process.
In the specific area switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d provided in the first special variable winning device 38 is monitored, and the specific area is specified based on the inflow of the game ball into the specific area (probability operating area). Performs the process of setting the area passage flag. Based on the setting of this specific area passage flag, a process for generating a special gaming state is performed.

Next, if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step Y134), and it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y135). Then, when the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y135; N), that is, when the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y153. Further, when the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y135; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0. (Step Y136).

When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y136; N), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (step Y137), and the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is extended to the special figure 2 game processing timer area. The fluctuation timer value (for example, 60,000 msec) is saved (step Y138), and the process proceeds to step Y153.
In order to prevent the player from intentionally executing the special figure 2 variable display game with a high probability of small hits in the normal gaming state, the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal gaming state is very long. (For example, 10 minutes). However, since the area that can be used as the special figure 2 game processing timer is limited, it is difficult to measure the fluctuation time at once even if the upper limit value is set as the initial value of the timer. Therefore, the fluctuation time is measured by a plurality of times using the number of repetitions, which is the number of times that the specified time (for example, 60,000 msec) is measured.

When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y136; Y), the special figure 2 game sequence branch table referred to for branching to the processing corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number is set in the register. Set (step Y139). Then, using the table, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number is acquired (step Y140), and the subroutine call by the special figure 2 game processing number is performed (step Y141).

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "0", the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 variable display game is monitored, and the variable start setting and effect setting of the special figure 2 variable display game, and the special figure 2 variable display game are set. FIG. 2 Special figure 2 for setting information necessary for performing processing during fluctuations Fig. 2 Ordinary processing (step Y142) is performed.
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "1", the special figure 2 sets the stop display time, sets the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 display processing, and the like. 2 Perform the variable processing (step Y143).
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, and each big hit type The special figure 2 display processing (step Y144) for setting the fanfare time according to the large winning opening opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like is performed.

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "3", the opening time of the large winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step Y145).
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the big winning opening. The large winning opening opening processing (step Y146) for setting the information necessary for performing the remaining ball processing is performed.

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, the process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, or the special figure 2 The big winning opening remaining ball processing (step Y147) for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit end processing is performed.
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "6", special figure 2 jackpot end processing (step Y148) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 2 normal processing (step Y108). I do.

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "7", the opening time / opening pattern of the large winning opening when a small hit occurs, the fanfare command is set, and the small hit medium processing is performed. The small hit fanfare process (step Y149) for setting the information necessary for the game is performed.
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "8", the small hit middle processing (step Y150) for setting the ending command, setting the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing, and the like is performed. Do.

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "9", the process of setting the time for the remaining balls that have won in the large winning opening during the small hit medium processing and the small hit end. The small hit remaining ball processing (step Y151) for setting the information necessary for performing the processing is performed.
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "10", the special figure 2 small hit end process (step Y152) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal processing is performed.

After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 is prepared (step Y153), the symbol fluctuation control process (step Y154) related to the special figure 2 display 52 is performed, and the lever solenoid is performed. The lever solenoid control process (step Y155) for controlling the operation of 38f is performed, and the special figure 2 game process is completed. This special figure 2 game process performs a process of performing a series of execution control related to the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). The above-mentioned special figure 2 game processing basically performs the same processing as the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing for special figure 2, and in the following description, the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing will be described. The corresponding processing will be described in parallel in.

[Special figure 1 Normal processing]
FIG. 23 shows the special figure 1 normal process (step Y109) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process. In this special figure 1 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 can start to fluctuate (step Y201). The state in which the special figure 1 in this determination can start the fluctuation is not between the stop of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, which is a big hit or a small hit, and the end of the special gaming state. In addition, although it is in a state where the fluctuation cannot be started even during the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special game state based on the special figure 1 variable display game, in that case, the special figure 1 is in a state where the normal processing is not executed. , It is not necessary to judge this here.

When the special figure 1 cannot start changing (step Y201; N), "0" is set as the special figure 1 game processing number (step Y216), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area. (Step Y217), Special Figure 1 The normal processing is completed. Further, when the special figure 1 is capable of starting fluctuation (step Y201; Y), it is determined whether the left-handed instruction notification has been completed, that is, whether the left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step Y202).
If the left-handed instruction has been notified (step Y202; Y), the process proceeds to step Y206. If the left-handed instruction notification has not been notified (step Y202; N), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step Y203), the effect command setting process (step Y204) is performed, and the left-handed instruction notification flag is set. (Step Y205). The left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared when the specific game state ends, so that the left-handed instruction notification is performed when shifting to the normal game state.

Next, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (step Y206), and if the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (step Y206; Y), the process proceeds to step Y216. Further, when the number of pending special figures 1 is not 0 (step Y206; N), the fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y207), and the effect command setting process (step Y208) is performed. .. After that, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step Y209) for setting the information related to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed, and the decorative special figure 1 hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared (step Y210). ), The effect command setting process (step Y211) is performed. At the time of performing the process of preparing the decorative special figure hold number command (step Y210), the special figure 1 hold number is not subtracted based on the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the current special figure 1 hold is not performed. A hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number obtained by subtracting -1 from the number is prepared. After that, the remaining game count command corresponding to the time reduction fluctuation number is prepared (step Y212), and the effect command setting process (step Y213) is performed.

Next, the special figure 1 changing state is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y214). Here, the special figure status indicates the state of the special figure variation display game, and any of 0 to 5 is set. Special figure status 0 indicates a state in which neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed, and special figure status 1 indicates a state in which only the special figure 1 variable display game is executed. The special figure status 2 indicates a state in which only the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. Further, the special figure status 3 indicates a state in which both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are being executed, and the special figure status 4 is the first special game state which is a special game state based on the jackpot. The special figure status 5 indicates that the game is in the second special game state, which is a special game state based on a small hit. Here, since the special figure 1 variable display game is started, 1 or 3 is set as the special figure status. After that, the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process (step Y215) is performed to end the special figure 1 normal process.

[Special figure 2 Normal processing]
FIG. 24 shows the special figure 2 normal processing (step Y142) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game processing. In this special figure 2 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 can start to fluctuate (step Y221). The state in which the special figure 2 in this determination can start the fluctuation is not between the stop of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, which is a big hit, and the end of the special gaming state. In addition, although it is in a state where the fluctuation cannot be started even during the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game or the special game state based on the special figure 2 variable display game, in that case, the special figure 2 is in a state where the normal processing is not executed. , It is not necessary to judge this here.

When the special figure 2 cannot start changing (step Y221; N), "0" is set as the special figure 2 game processing number (step Y238), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area. (Step Y239), Special Figure 2 The normal processing is completed. Further, when the special figure 2 can start to fluctuate (step Y221; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figures 2 is 0 (step Y222).

Then, when the number of pending special figures 2 is not 0 (step Y222; N), the fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y223), and the effect command setting process (step Y224) is performed. .. After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step Y225) for setting the information related to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed, and the decorative special figure 2 hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is prepared (step Y226). ), The effect command setting process (step Y227) is performed. At the time of performing the process of preparing the decorative special figure hold number command (step Y226), the special figure 2 hold number is not subtracted based on the start of the special figure 2 variable display game, and the current special figure 2 hold is not performed. We are preparing a hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number that is -1 from the number. After that, the remaining game count command corresponding to the time reduction fluctuation number is prepared (step Y228), and the effect command setting process (step Y229) is performed.

Next, the special figure 2 changing state is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y230). Here, since the special figure 2 variable display game is started, 2 or 3 is set as the special figure status. After that, the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process (step Y231) is performed to end the special figure 2 normal process.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (step Y222; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 hold number is 0 (step Y232). Then, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (step Y232; Y), it is determined whether or not special figure 1 is changing (step Y233). Then, when the special figure 1 is not changing (step Y233; N), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has started (step Y234), and when it has not started (step Y234; N), the customer waiting demo has been started. Performs processing related to state setting. Further, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is not 0 (step Y232; N), when special figure 1 is changing (step Y233; Y), or when the customer waiting demo has already started (step Y234; Y). Goes to step Y238.

In the process related to the setting of the customer waiting state, first, the customer waiting demo flag area is set (step Y235), the customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y236), and the effect is produced. The command setting process (step Y237) is performed, and the process proceeds to step Y238. By making the customer waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to display different customer waiting screens according to the probability state.

Further, if the effect control device 300 is restarted for some reason, the effect control device 300 that does not have the backup function loses the game state information, so that it becomes impossible to perform an appropriate effect. By making the waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to perform an effect according to the game state from the reception of this command, and the probability information command based on the change in the game state is transmitted. You will be able to return to the production according to the game state faster than waiting.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, and it is conceivable that the probability state changes depending on the processing of the special figure 1 variable display game. Therefore, the fluctuation start probability information command is transmitted every time the special figure fluctuation display game is started (steps Y207 and Y223). As a result, the effect control device 300 can perform an appropriate effect according to the game state.

In addition, by transmitting the fluctuation start probability information command every time the special figure fluctuation display game starts, even if the effect control device 300 is restarted, the effect according to the game state can be performed from the reception of this command. This makes it possible to return to the effect according to the game state faster than waiting for the probability information command based on the change in the game state to be transmitted. It should be noted that the customer waiting demo command and the fluctuation start probability information command may include other information for allowing the effect control device 300 to return to the effect according to the game state when the effect control device 300 is restarted.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Start Processing]
FIG. 25A shows the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step Y209) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 normal process. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game. In this special figure 1 fluctuation start process, first, the special figure 1 information setting flag used for sorting the fluctuation pattern in the special figure hold information determination process is set (step Y241). Next, a random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 1 fall lottery random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM (step Y242), and the special figure 1 fall lottery random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0. (Step Y243), a fall lottery process (step Y244) for drawing a transition from the high probability state to the low probability state is performed. The number of hold 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1).

Next, the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step Y245) for setting the missed information or the jackpot information as the result information of the special figure 1 variable display game is performed, and the special figure 1 stop related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) is performed. The symbol setting process (step Y246) is performed. Then, in order to perform the special figure 1 information setting process (step Y247) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern, and to refer to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. A special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which the information of the above is set, is prepared (step Y248).

After that, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y249) for setting the fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation mode in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed, and the fluctuation start information setting for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed. The process (step Y250) is performed, and the time reduction variation number update process (step Y251) is performed. Next, "1" related to the special figure 1 changing process is set as the process number (step Y252), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step Y253).

Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y254), and the signal related to the start of fluctuation of special figure 1 (for example, the signal during change of special symbol 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y255). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y256), and the initial value (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area. Here, 100 msec) is saved (step Y257), the initial value (here, “0” indicating a blank symbol) is saved in the symbol number area during the change of the special figure 1 (step Y258), and the special figure 1 change start process is performed. To finish.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 25B shows the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step Y225) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 normal process. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, first, the special figure 2 information setting flag used for sorting the fluctuation pattern in the special figure hold information determination process is set (step Y261). Next, a random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 2 fall lottery random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM (step Y262), and the special figure 2 fall lottery random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0. (Step Y263), a fall lottery process (step Y264) for drawing a transition from the high probability state to the low probability state is performed. The number of hold 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2).

Next, the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step Y265) for setting the missed information, the jackpot information, or the small hit information is performed as the result information of the special figure 2 variable display game, and the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) is performed. Special figure 2 Stop symbol setting process (step Y266) is performed. Then, in order to perform the special figure 2 information setting process (step Y267) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern, and to refer to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. A special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which the information of the above is set, is prepared (step Y268).

After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y269) for setting the fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation mode in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed, and the fluctuation start information setting for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed. The process (step Y270) is performed, and the time reduction fluctuation start update process (step Y271) is performed. Next, "1" related to the special figure 2 changing process is set as the process number (step Y272), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step Y273).

Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y274), and the signal related to the start of fluctuation of special figure 2 (for example, the signal during change of special symbol 2 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y275). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y276), and the initial value (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 indicator 52) of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 indicator 52) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area. Here, 100 msec) is saved (step Y277), the initial value (here, “0” indicating a blank symbol) is saved in the symbol number area during special figure 2 change (step Y278), and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing is performed. To finish.

In addition, when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing, the information of the set probability setting value may be referred to. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of suggesting or notifying the probability set value, such as selecting a fluctuation pattern according to the probability set value or making the selection probability of the fluctuation pattern different according to the probability set value.

[Fall lottery process]
FIG. 26 shows a fall lottery process (steps Y244 and Y264) performed in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 change start process. In this fall lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure has a high probability (step Y581), and if it is not in the special figure high probability (step Y581; N), the fall lottery process ends. Further, when the special figure is in high probability (step Y581; Y), it is determined whether the value of the target fall lottery random number is less than the fall lottery lower limit determination value (step Y582). It should be noted that winning the fall lottery means that the fall lottery random number matches the fall lottery determination value. The fall lottery judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the fall lottery random number is equal to or higher than the fall lottery lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the fall lottery judgment value and is the upper limit value of the fall lottery judgment value. If it is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value, it is determined that the fall lottery has been won.

If the value of the fall lottery random number is less than the fall lottery lower limit determination value (step Y582; Y), that is, if the fall lottery is not won, the fall lottery process is terminated. In this case, the high probability state is maintained. On the other hand, when the value of the fall lottery random number is not less than the fall lottery lower limit determination value (step Y582; N), it is determined whether the value of the target fall lottery random number is larger than the fall lottery upper limit determination value (step Y583).
If the value of the fall lottery random number is larger than the fall lottery upper limit determination value (step Y583; Y), that is, if the fall lottery is not won, the fall lottery process is terminated. In this case, the high probability state is maintained. On the other hand, when the value of the fall lottery random number is not larger than the fall lottery upper limit determination value (step X583; N), that is, when the fall lottery is won, the process for shifting to the low probability state is performed.

In the process for shifting to the low probability state, first, the signal relating to the high probability end is saved in the external information output data area (step Y584). Here, the big hit 2 signal is set to ON, and the big hit 4 signal is set to OFF. Next, the signal relating to the end of high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y585). Here, the special symbol 1 high-probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 2 high-probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal is set to OFF.
Then, the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y586), and the number without time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step Y587). After that, the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y588), and the fall lottery process is completed. As a result, the state becomes a low probability state and there is no general electric support, and the state shifts to the normal game state. Information on the end of the high-probability state and the end of the general electric support is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 performs processing such as changing the effect mode based on this information.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 27A shows the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step Y245) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In this jackpot flag 1 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (step Y281). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM (step Y282), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (for the number of hold 1). Step Y283).

After that, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 2 which is the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is a jackpot (step Y284), and if it is a jackpot (step Y284; Y), the jackpot flag 1 is set. End the process. That is, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed at the same time are not big hits. If it is not a big hit (step Y284; N), a big hit determination process (step Y285) is performed to determine whether the acquired big hit random value is a big hit depending on whether or not it matches the big hit determination value.

Then, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step Y285) is a jackpot (step Y286; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step Y281 (step). Y287), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is completed. On the other hand, if the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step Y285) is not a jackpot (step Y286; N), the jackpot flag 1 setting process ends. In this case, the loss information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 27B shows the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step Y265) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y291), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y292). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM (step Y293), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (for the number of hold 1). Step Y294).

After that, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 1 which is the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is a jackpot (step Y295), and if it is a jackpot (step Y295; Y), the process proceeds to step Y299. To do. That is, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed at the same time are not big hits. If it is not a big hit (step Y295; N), a big hit determination process (step Y296) is performed to determine whether the acquired big hit random value is a big hit depending on whether or not it matches the big hit determination value.
Then, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step Y296) is a jackpot (step Y297; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step Y292 (step). Y298), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the judgment result of the big hit determination process (step Y296) is not a big hit (step Y297; N), it is determined whether the acquired big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. The small hit determination process (step Y299) is performed.
Then, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is a small hit (step Y300; Y), the small hit information is overwritten in the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step Y291. Save (step Y301) and end the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is not a small hit (step Y300; N), the large hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area and the small hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit judgment process]
FIG. 28 shows the jackpot determination process (steps Y285, Y296) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 setting process described above. In this jackpot determination process, first, the lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step Y311), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

When the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312; Y), that is, when it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y317), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. In addition, the loss as a judgment result indicates that the lottery for the big hit has been missed. On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure has a high probability (step Y313).

Then, when the special figure is in high probability (step Y313; Y), the upper limit determination value in high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step Y314), and the value of the target jackpot random number is the upper limit. It is determined whether it is larger than the determination value (step Y316). Further, when the special figure is not in the high probability (step Y313; N), the upper limit determination value in the low probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step Y315), and the value of the target jackpot random number is the upper limit determination. It is determined whether it is larger than the value (step Y316).

If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y317), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316; N), that is, when it is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the determination result (step Y318), and the jackpot determination process is terminated.

[Small hit judgment processing]
FIG. 29 shows a small hit determination process (step Y299) in the above-mentioned big hit flag 2 setting process. In this small hit determination process, first, it is determined whether the value of the target large hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321). The small hit means that the big hit random number (the same random number as the big hit determination) matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or more than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit. Moreover, the big hit judgment value and the small hit judgment value do not overlap.

When the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; Y), that is, when it is not a small hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y323), and the small hit determination process is terminated. In addition, the loss as a judgment result indicates that the lottery for small hits has been missed. When the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; N), it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y322).

When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y322; Y), that is, when it is not a small hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y323), and the small hit determination process is terminated. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y322; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the determination result (step Y324), and the small hit determination process is performed. finish.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 30 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y246) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In this special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step Y331), and if it is a big hit (step Y331; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1). Load the jackpot symbol random number from (for) (step Y332). Next, the special figure 1 jackpot symbol table is set (step Y333), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y334). The jackpot type is selected by this process. The stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable display game is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol area when a special result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game. This is because there is a possibility that the result will be forcibly removed.

After that, the special figure 1 jackpot stop symbol information table is set (step Y335), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y336). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special diagram 1 display 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (step Y337), and the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired to obtain the number of special figure 1 rounds. Save in the upper limit information area (step Y338), acquire the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number, save it in the special drawing 1 large winning opening opening information area (step Y339), and proceed to step Y340. .. This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state.

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y331; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y344), and the missed stop symbol pattern is set in the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern area. Save (step Y345). Next, the decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared and saved in the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y340). As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set. After that, the effect command setting process (step Y341) is performed. As a result, the decorative special figure 1 command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y342), the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y343), and the special figure 1 Stop The symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 31 shows a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y266) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. The special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is the same process as the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process for the special figure 2. In this special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step Y361), and if it is a big hit (step Y361; Y), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1). Load the jackpot symbol random number from (for) (step Y362). Next, the special figure 2 jackpot symbol table is set (step Y363), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y364). The jackpot type is selected by this process. The stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable display game is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 2 stop symbol area when a special result is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game. This is because there is a possibility that the result will be forcibly removed.

After that, the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y365), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y366). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special diagram 2 display 52) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (step Y367), and the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired to obtain the number of special figure 2 rounds. Save in the upper limit information area (step Y368), acquire the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number, save it in the special drawing 2 large winning opening opening information area (step Y369), and proceed to step Y370. .. This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state.

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y361; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y375), and if it is a small hit (step Y375; Y), the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number. A small hit symbol random number is loaded from the storage area (for the number of hold 1) (step Y376). Next, the special figure 2 small hit symbol table is set (step Y377), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y378). The small hit type is selected by this process. After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y379), and the process proceeds to step Y370.

If the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y375; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y380), and the miss stop symbol pattern is set as a special figure. 2 Save in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y381). Next, the decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared and saved in the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y370). As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set. After that, the effect command setting process (step Y371) is performed. As a result, the decorative special figure 2 command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y372), the special figure 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y373), and the special figure 2 The small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y374), and the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is completed.

Here, the relationship between the stop symbol pattern and the decorative special figure command (decorative special figure 1 command, decorative special figure 2 command) will be described. FIG. 32A shows a decorative special figure command table that defines the relationship between the stop symbol pattern stored in the ROM 111B of the game control device 100 and the decorative special figure command. The name of the stop symbol pattern is "stop symbol pattern * (* is a number)", and the numbers are numbered in order from 0. This number is called a stop symbol number, and forms a unique number that is a unique number for each stop symbol pattern.

In FIGS. 30 and 31, in the case of a big hit, the stop symbol number corresponding to the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number or the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number is selected, and in the case of a small hit, the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number is selected. The corresponding stop symbol number is selected, and in the case of an outlier, the outlier stop symbol number is selected. The special figure 1 big hit symbol random number, the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number, and the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number are consecutive numerical values in a predetermined range, and the stop symbol number corresponding to the numerical value randomly extracted from them is selected. It has become like. By setting these symbol random numbers into continuous numerical values in a predetermined range, it becomes easy to understand the definition of the random number update process and the association with the stop symbol, and it becomes easy to handle in the development of the program.

In this embodiment, since there is only one type of small hit, it is not necessary to use the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number, but when there are multiple types of small hits, the value of the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number. The stop symbol number will be selected based on. In addition, although the selection by the symbol random number is not performed for the loss, it can be said that the selection that the result is the loss is performed by the big hit random number. The jackpot random number is also a continuous numerical value in a predetermined range, and the result of the special figure variation display game is selected based on the numerical value randomly extracted from the numerical value.

The stop symbol number is a continuous value from 0 to 7, while the value of the command associated with each stop symbol pattern is a discontinuous value. This is because the effect control device 300 can be commonly used by a plurality of types of game control devices 100 having different types of information to be transmitted, and possesses data corresponding to all the information that can be transmitted from the usable game control device 100. Because it is doing.

Examples of the plurality of types of game control devices 100 having different types of information to be transmitted include those of the same model but different specifications such as jackpot probability. In this case, there are some common parts and different parts regarding the selectable effects and jackpot types, and the effect control device 300 stores all the data, and the game control device 100 corresponds to the one used by itself. Only the information that has been sent will be sent. Of course, the specifications are not limited to the game control device 100 of the same model, and the game control device 100 of another model may be used, and all the data of the game control device 100 to be used may be stored.

FIG. 32B shows a table that defines the relationship between the stop symbol and the decorative special diagram command stored in the PROM 321 of the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 is assigned a stop symbol for each of the consecutive command values from 00H to 0FH. The game control device 100 of the present embodiment uses only seven of these stop symbols, and does not use the shaded stop symbols. The shaded stop symbol is used in another game control device 100 having a different type of information to be transmitted.

That is, in a group in which the type of information is a stop symbol, the value of the command associated with each of the plurality of information included in one group is within the range defined by the group (here, 00H to 0FH). It is a value, and the range is a range that is the number of types of information (16 in this case) included in the group that can be used by a plurality of game control devices 100 having different types of information to be transmitted. Further, although the range of command values and the number of types of information match here, the range of command values may be wider and include unused command values. The value of the command that is not used is a preliminary value, and if it is used when the number of stopped symbols increases in the development process, it is not necessary to change the value of the command of another group, and the efficiency of program development is improved. Can be done.

In this way, the effect control device 300 defines all the stop symbols that can be set by the usable game control device 100, and assigns decorative special figure commands so as to have continuous values. As a result, the data of the effect control device 300 can be used by the plurality of game control devices 100 without changing the data, and the versatility is enhanced. Further, if the stop symbol stored in the effect control device 300 is used at the design stage of the game control device 100, it is not necessary to change the data of the effect control device 300, and the efficiency of development can be improved.

In the game control device 100, only the stop symbols used by the game control device 100 are defined, and the stop symbol numbers are assigned so as to be consecutive numbers. Then, the stop symbol number, which is a continuous predetermined range value, is selected based on the symbol random number or the jackpot random number, which is a continuous predetermined range value. By making the information of continuous values used in the internal processing of the game control device 100 in this way, the design of the control processing becomes easy. For example, by setting the stop symbol numbers to consecutive numbers, it is not necessary to consider missing numbers in other processes of the game control device 100 that refers to the stop symbol numbers, and the design becomes easy. If the number of stop symbols increases or decreases at the design stage, it is necessary to change the stop symbol number, but the work is easy because there are few types of stop symbols.

As shown in FIG. 32 (b), in the effect control device 300, a decorative special figure command is assigned so that the information of the stop symbol in the effect control device 300 becomes a continuous value. Therefore, in the game control device 100, the value of the decoration special figure command transmitted to the effect control device 300 is converted in the decoration special figure command table so as to be a value according to the definition in the effect control device 300. .. That is, each control device can handle information as a continuous value in its own processing. Then, when the information is transmitted to another control device, the conversion process is performed so that the value is in accordance with the definition at the transmission destination. This facilitates the design of the program in each control device.

FIG. 33 is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process executed by the CPU 111A of the game control device 100. Each program list of the game control program executed by the game control device 100 is a list of instructions in assembly language (source code) similar to Z80, which is an 8-bit microprocessor, except for pseudo instructions (instructions for the assembler) and the like. , There is a one-to-one correspondence with the machine language instruction (machine code) stored in the ROM 111b (game control program storage means).

From the left side, the description of the instruction (code) in each program list is the "line number" attached for convenience, the "mnemonic" indicating the operation content (calculation content) of the instruction, the "operand" of the instruction target, and the convenience of explanation. It is divided into "comments" attached for. The instructions in the program list are basically executed from the top to the bottom of the program list in the order of line numbers (from small to large) unless there is an instruction to call a subroutine or a jump instruction (branch instruction).

The code of line numbers 1020 and 1030 corresponds to the process of step Y331, determines whether the jackpot flag is stored in the jackpot flag 1 area, and branches the process according to the determination result. The code of line number 1060 corresponds to the process of step Y332, and loads the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number into the A register. After that, a process of selecting a stop symbol number from the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number is performed.

The codes of line numbers 1230 to 1280 correspond to the processing of steps Y340 and Y341. At line number 1230, the start address D_TZ_COM of the decorative special figure command table shown in FIG. 32 (a) is loaded into the HL register, and at line number 1240, the stop symbol pattern (stop symbol number) is loaded into the A register. The command value corresponding to the stop symbol number is stored in the A register by the processing of the line number 1250, and the command value of the A register is loaded in the C register at the line number 1260. This command value is a value corresponding to the ACTION of the decorative special figure 1 command.

At line number 1270, the value corresponding to the MODE of the decorative special figure 1 command is loaded in the B register, and at line number 1280, the values of the B register and C register are saved in the decorative special figure 1 command area. At line number 1290, the effect command setting process is performed. By the above processing, the stop symbol number is converted into the decorative special figure 1 command and transmitted to the effect control device 300.

In the above description, the effect control device 300 can be commonly used by a plurality of types of game control devices 100 having different types of information to be transmitted, but the effect control device 300 is only available in a single game control device 100. It may be usable. Even in this case, it is possible to have data corresponding to a value other than the value (command) that can be transmitted from the game control device 100. Further, even when the effect control device 300 can be commonly used by a plurality of types of game control devices 100 having different types of information to be transmitted, a value that can be transmitted from all the usable game control devices 100 ( You may have data corresponding to values other than command).

In this way, when the effect control device 300 holds data corresponding to a value other than the value (command) that can be transmitted from the corresponding game control device 100, the effect control device stores the data that is no longer used in the development process. In 300, there is a case where it is left as it is. Further, there is also a case where a part or all the data of the effect control device 300 is set as a common specification and a part of the data required according to the gaming machine to be used is used. In this way, by keeping the data corresponding to the values (commands) other than the values (commands) that can be transmitted from the corresponding game control device 100, the effect control device 300 can save the trouble of deleting or recombining the data. The efficiency of development can be improved.

Even when the game control device 100 has data corresponding to a value other than the value (command) that can be transmitted from the corresponding game control device 100, the game control device 100 has the effect control device 300 for each stop symbol pattern. The value of the associated command is used, and the stop symbol number used in the own process is a continuous value. For example, the command and the stop symbol number as shown in FIG. 32 are associated with each other. The command value is also associated with the data not used by the corresponding game control device 100 (the shaded portion in FIG. 32B), and the value is not used by the game control device 100 as a command. Although it is a value (for example, 05H), it is a value within a range (00H to 0FH) pre-assigned as a command range for the group to which the data belongs.

From the above, a game in which a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, a game in which a state advantageous to the player is generated, the game is comprehensively controlled. The game control means includes a control means (game control device 100) and a slave control means (effect control device 300) that performs control based on information transmitted from the game control means, and the game control means previously provides each of the transmittable information. Information (for example, stop symbol information) is configured to be transmitted to the slave control means using the associated value (command), and the information is classified into a group defined by the type of information into one group. The value associated with each of the plurality of included information is a value within the range defined for each group, and only a part of the values within the range is used. Therefore, by allocating a range of values that is larger than the number of information used in one group, it is not necessary to change the values of other groups even if the number of information increases at the design stage, and development efficiency Can be enhanced.

In addition, the range of values is a range that is equal to or greater than the number of types of information included in the group, and only the values within the range corresponding to the information used by the user are used. .. Therefore, by allocating a range of values that is larger than the number of information used in one group, it is not necessary to change the values of other groups even if the number of information increases in development, and development efficiency can be improved. Can be enhanced.

In addition, the range of values is a range that is equal to or greater than the number of types of information included in the group that can be used by a plurality of game control means having different types of information to be transmitted, and the values within the range are used by themselves. It means that only the value corresponding to the information to be used is used. Therefore, by allocating a range of values that is larger than the number of information used in one group, even if the number of information increases in the development of multiple game control means with different types of information to be transmitted, other groups There is no need to change the value of, and development efficiency can be improved.

Further, the slave control means is configured to perform control using one data corresponding to the value transmitted from the game control means from among the plurality of possessed data, and the data corresponding to one group. As a result, the group has a larger number of data than the number of values that can be transmitted from the game control means. Therefore, the data of one subordinate control means can be used in common. Further, in development, it is possible to select whether or not to use the data within the range of the data, and it is possible to improve the efficiency of development.

Further, the slave control means can be commonly used by a plurality of game control means having different types of information to be transmitted, and possesses data corresponding to all the values that can be transmitted from the plurality of game control means. Become. Therefore, one subordinate control means can be used in common, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

In addition, a unique number, which is a continuous number, is attached to the information included in the group and used by itself, and the unique number can be used to execute processing related to the game. When selecting one piece of information from each information contained in, a lottery process is performed in which a numerical value is randomly extracted from a continuous predetermined range of numerical values, and the unique number is selected based on the numerical value, and the selection is performed by the lottery process. The process related to the game is executed based on the unique number, and the value corresponding to the unique number is transmitted to the slave control means. Therefore, by using consecutive numerical values or unique numbers in the internal processing of the game control means, it is possible to facilitate the handling of the game control means at the time of development and improve the efficiency of development.

Further, the slave control means associates consecutive values within the range with the information included in one group, and the game control means converts the unique number into the associated value in the data of the slave control means. The conversion process is performed, and the value obtained by the conversion process is transmitted to the slave control means. Therefore, by using continuous values in the internal processing of the slave control means, it is possible to facilitate understanding at the time of development of the program of the slave control means and improve the efficiency of development. That is, the game control means and the slave control means are designed to perform processing using consecutive numerical values in the internal processing, and when transmitting information, they are converted into values according to the definition of the destination. I try to send it.

[Special Figure 1 Information Setting Process]
FIG. 34 shows the special figure 1 information setting process (step Y247) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In this special figure 1 information setting process, first, the variation pattern selection information table is set (step Y401), and the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern are acquired (step Y402). It is determined whether or not the big hit of FIG. 1, that is, the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is the stop symbol pattern of the big hit (step Y403). In the case of a special figure 1 big hit (step Y403; Y), the process proceeds to step Y405.

If it is not a special figure 1 jackpot (step Y403; N), the value is converted by adding the special figure 1 hold number to the first half offset data (step Y404). Then, the first half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y405). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area. This fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is later used to select a fluctuation group.

After that, the latter half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y405), and the special figure 1 information setting process is completed. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. The fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (type of reach (including no reach)), and is later used to select a fluctuation group.
In this way, in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the fluctuation pattern is determined in consideration of the special figure 1 hold number only in the first half fluctuation pattern in the case of a miss, and in the case of a big hit, consider the special figure 1 hold number. The fluctuation pattern is determined without.

[Special Figure 2 Information Setting Process]
FIG. 35 shows the special figure 2 information setting process (step Y267) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this special figure 2 information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure has a low probability and no time reduction (during a normal game state) (step Y421). Special figure Low probability & No time reduction When it is not in the middle (step Y421; N), it is determined whether it is the time reduction final variation (step Y427). Here, when the special figure 2 variation display game to be started is the special figure variation display game 100 times (the number of times of support) from the end of the special game state, it is determined that the time is shortened and the final variation is made.

Then, in the case of the time reduction final variation (step Y427; Y), the process proceeds to step Y428. If the time is not the final variation (step Y427; N), the variation pattern selection information table is set (step Y423), and the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern are acquired. (Step Y424), the process proceeds to step Y425.

On the other hand, when the special figure has a low probability and no time reduction (step Y421; Y), it is determined whether the final variation has a high probability (step Y427). Here, when the fall lottery for the special figure 2 variation display game to be started is won, it is determined that the final variation has a high probability.
Then, in the case of a high-probability final variation (step Y427; Y), the first half offset data and the second half offset data for the final variation are set (step Y428), and the process proceeds to step Y425.
If it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y427; N), it is determined whether or not it is a special figure 2 jackpot (step Y429). Then, when the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y429; N), the first half offset data for the special figure 2 missed / small hit at low probability is set (step Y430), and the second half offset data for the special figure 2 length variation is set. Is set (step Y432), and the process proceeds to step Y425.

Further, in the case of the special figure 2 big hit (step Y429; Y), the first half offset data for the special figure 2 big hit at low probability is set (step Y431), and the second half offset data for the special figure 2 length variation is set. (Step Y432). Then, the first half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y425). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area. This fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is later used to select a fluctuation group.

After that, the latter half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y426), and the special figure 2 information setting process is completed. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. The fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (type of reach (including no reach)), and is later used to select a fluctuation group.
As described above, in the special figure 2 variation display game, the variation pattern is determined without considering the number of reservations in the special figure 2.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation pattern setting process]
FIG. 36 shows the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y249) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process. The fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. It consists of a pattern, and the latter half fluctuation pattern is set first, then the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern is selected by combining these.

In this special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process, first, the fluctuation group address table is set (step Y451), and the address of the latter half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y452). The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared from the variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of FIG. 1 (step Y453).
Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is off, that is, the stop symbol pattern is the off-stop symbol pattern (step Y454), and if the special figure 1 is off (step Y454; Y), a 2-byte distribution process (step Y455) is performed. )I do. If the special figure 1 is not out of alignment (step Y454; N), the sorting process (step Y456) is performed.

In the present embodiment, the structure of the latter half variable group table is different between the one for hitting and the one for hitting. Specifically, the hit size is 1 byte size, and the loss size is 2 byte size. Since the rate of occurrence of hits is lower than the rate of occurrence of loss and even one byte is sufficient, the size of hits is one byte from the viewpoint of saving data capacity. Therefore, at the time of hitting, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used. In addition, the rate of occurrence of loss is higher than the rate of occurrence of hit, and in order to enable a wider variety of effects, the size for loss is 2 bytes.

Then, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of distribution is acquired and prepared (step Y457), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of the special figure 1. And prepare (step Y458). Next, the distribution process (step Y459) is performed, and the latter half variable number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half variable number area (step Y460). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

Next, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step Y461), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the second half fluctuation number determined as the fluctuation distribution information 1 (step Y462). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step Y463), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of hold 1) of the special figure 1. Prepare (step Y464).
After that, the distribution process (step Y465) is performed, and the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired (step Y466). The first half fluctuation pattern is set by this process. Then, the first half fluctuation number and the second half fluctuation number are added to generate a fluctuation pattern number (step Y467), the fluctuation pattern number is saved in the fluctuation pattern number area (step Y468), and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process is completed. To do. As a result, the fluctuation pattern for the entire period of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be started is set.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process]
FIG. 37 shows the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y269) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process, first, the fluctuation group address table is set (step Y471), and the address of the latter half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y472). The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared from the variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of FIG. 2 (step Y473).

Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is off, that is, the stop symbol pattern is the off-stop symbol pattern (step Y474), and if the special figure 2 is off (step Y474; Y), a 2-byte distribution process (step Y475) is performed. )I do. If the special figure 2 is not out of alignment (step Y474; N), the sorting process (step Y476) is performed.

Then, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of distribution is acquired and prepared (step Y477), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of the special figure 2. And prepare (step Y478). Next, the distribution process (step Y479) is performed, and the latter half variable number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half variable number area (step Y480). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

Next, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step Y481), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the second half fluctuation number determined as the fluctuation distribution information 1 (step Y482). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step Y483), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of hold 1) of the special figure 2. Prepare (step Y484).
After that, the distribution process (step Y485) is performed, and the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired (step Y486). By this process, the first half fluctuation pattern is set. Then, the first half fluctuation number and the second half fluctuation number are added to generate the fluctuation pattern number (step Y487), the fluctuation pattern number is saved in the fluctuation pattern number area (step Y488), and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process is completed. To do. As a result, the fluctuation pattern for the entire period of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to be started from now on will be set.

[Fluctuation start information setting process]
FIG. 38 shows the fluctuation start information setting processing (steps Y250, Y270) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. In this fluctuation start information setting process, first, the random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of the target fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step Y551). Next, the fluctuation pattern number correction table is set (step Y552), the subtraction value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern number is acquired (step Y553), and the subtraction value is subtracted from the fluctuation pattern number to correct (step Y554). After that, the fluctuation time value table is set (step Y555), the fluctuation time value corresponding to the corrected fluctuation pattern number is acquired (step Y556), and the fluctuation time value is saved in the target special figure game processing timer area. (Step Y557).

In the special figure 2 variation display game in the normal game state, a long variation with a very long variation time is set. In this case, as the above-mentioned added value, the remaining time (time less than 60,000 msec) excluding the time that can be measured using the number of repetitions, which is the number of times that the specified time (here, 60,000 msec) is timed, is the added value. It is calculated as.

After that, it is determined whether the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y558), and if the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y558; Y), the process proceeds to step Y562. Further, when the information of the special figure 1 is not set (step Y558; N), that is, when the information of the special figure 2 is being set, it is determined whether the long variation of the special figure 2 has started (step Y559). The long variation is a variation pattern set in the normal gaming state of the special figure 2 variation display game, and is determined by the number of the set variation pattern.

Then, when it is not the start of the long variation of the special figure 2 (step Y559; N), 0 is saved in the repetition number area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y560). Further, when the long variation of the special figure 2 is started (step Y559; Y), 9 is saved in the repetition number area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y561).

After that, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the variation pattern number before correction is prepared (step Y562), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the variation pattern number before correction is prepared (step Y563), and an effect command setting is performed. The process (step Y564) is performed. Next, the number of pending targets is updated by -1 (step Y566), the contents of the target random number storage area are shifted (step Y566), the free area after the shift is cleared (step Y567), and the fluctuation start information is set. End the process.

In the present embodiment, the number of repetitions is set for the long variation of FIG. 2 in order to vary the time that is not enough for the 2-byte timer. In the fluctuation start information setting process, the timer of 60,000 msec and the number of repetitions of 9 are saved as the addition result, the timer is subtracted by the timer interrupt process, and when the time is up, the number of repetitions is subtracted by 1 to the game processing timer of 60000 m. Set the seconds. As a result, the fluctuation time of the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 becomes 10 minutes (= 60000 ms × 10). Since the timer interrupt cycle is 4 msec, it can be set up to about 262 seconds with 2 bytes, but for ease of understanding, it can be expressed by multiplying by 60 seconds.

Here, the details of the process of acquiring the fluctuation time value from the selected special figure fluctuation pattern will be described. FIG. 39 shows a fluctuation time value table that defines the relationship between the special figure fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time value. The name of the special figure fluctuation pattern is "special figure fluctuation pattern * (* is a number)", and the numbers are numbered in order from 1. This number is called a variation pattern number, and forms a unique number that is a unique number for each special figure variation pattern. In FIGS. 36 and 37, the special figure variation pattern of the variation pattern number corresponding to the value obtained by adding the first half variation number and the second half variation number selected by the variation pattern random number is selected. ..

In this embodiment, a part of the special figure fluctuation patterns 30 to 33 is missing, for example. In FIG. 39, a blank is provided so that the missing number portion can be easily understood, but in the actual data, there is no blank and the data is stored. At the beginning of development, there are no missing numbers and there are special figure fluctuation patterns, and each special figure fluctuation pattern is numbered in order from 1, but due to the deletion of the special figure fluctuation pattern in the subsequent development process. A missing number has occurred. Due to such a missing number, the gaming machine of the present embodiment has up to the special figure variation pattern 82, but the number of special figure variation patterns is 70. By deleting and packing unused data in this way, the area of ROM 111B can be used efficiently without waste.

As described above, in the selection of the special figure fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern number is calculated from the first half fluctuation number and the second half fluctuation number. Therefore, if the fluctuation pattern number is changed along with the deletion of the special figure fluctuation pattern, the first half fluctuation number and the second half fluctuation number also need to be changed, which complicates the correction work. In particular, the number of special symbol fluctuation patterns is larger than that of the stop symbol pattern, and the correction work is complicated. For this reason, the variation pattern number is not changed and is left as a missing number in order to improve the efficiency of development.

When acquiring the fluctuation time value from the fluctuation pattern number, the fluctuation time value is acquired by referring to the selected fluctuation pattern number with reference to the fluctuation time value table shown in FIG. 39. However, since the missing numbers are filled in the data stored in the ROM 111B of the game control device 100 so as not to provide a blank line, the special figure variation pattern number corresponding to the special figure variation pattern and the corresponding There is a discrepancy between the ranking counted from the top of the fluctuation time value table of the special figure fluctuation pattern. For example, in the information of the special figure fluctuation pattern 34, since the special figure fluctuation patterns 30 to 33 are missing numbers, the rank from the beginning of the fluctuation time value table is the 30th position, so that the rank and the special figure fluctuation pattern number There is a gap between the two. Therefore, when acquiring the fluctuation time value, the fluctuation pattern number is corrected to obtain the correction number, and the correction number is referred to the fluctuation time value table to acquire the fluctuation time value.

FIG. 40 shows a variation pattern number correction table for correcting variation pattern numbers. Since the number of missing numbers in the previous numbers differs depending on the fluctuation pattern number to be corrected, the subtraction value is defined according to the fluctuation pattern number to be corrected. The correction number can be calculated by subtracting the subtraction value from the fluctuation pattern number to be corrected, and this correction number becomes the order from the top of the fluctuation time value table. For example, when the fluctuation pattern number is 34 to 51, the order is obtained from the beginning of the fluctuation time value table by subtracting 4 which is a minute of the special figure fluctuation pattern 30 to 33 which is a missing number.

In this way, for the special figure fluctuation pattern, the missing number is dealt with by the correction process by calculation, and for the stop symbol pattern, the missing number is dealt with by replacing the table. Since the number of stop symbol patterns is small, there is no problem even if they are replaced by a table. However, since there are many special figure fluctuation patterns, if the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern numbers and the correction numbers is replaced by using a table that defines all the fluctuation pattern numbers, a table with a large amount of data is required. For this reason, the special figure fluctuation pattern is dealt with by correction processing by calculation to prevent an increase in the amount of data, so that the area of ROM 111B can be used efficiently.

FIG. 41 is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the fluctuation start information setting process executed by the CPU 111A of the game control device 100. The codes of line numbers 2020 to 2040 correspond to the processing of step Y551. Further, the code of line number 2090 corresponds to the process of step Y552, and loads the start address D_HEN_NUM_REV of the variation pattern number correction table into the HL register. The codes in line numbers 2100 to 2200 correspond to the processing in step Y553, and in line number 2100, the numerical value corresponding to the label R_HEN_NUM + 00H is loaded into the A register. The label R_HEN_NUM + 00H indicates the address of the RAM 111C that stores the variation pattern number selected based on the random number. After that, the fluctuation pattern number loaded in the A register is sequentially referred to the comparison value of the fluctuation pattern number correction table, and when it is determined that the row number 2150 is less than the comparison value, the corresponding address is subtracted by the row number 2200. Load the value into the E register.

The code at line number 2210 corresponds to the process of step Y554 and subtracts the subtraction value loaded in the E register from the variation pattern number loaded in the A register. The code at line number 2220 corresponds to the process of step Y555 and loads the start address D_HEN_TIM of the variable time value table into the HL register. The code of line number 2230 corresponds to the process of step Y556, calls the 2-byte data acquisition process corresponding to the label P_GET_WORD, and acquires the variation time value corresponding to the corrected variation pattern number from the variation time value table. The acquired time value is stored in the HL register. The code at line number 2240 corresponds to the process of step Y557 and loads the variable time value stored in the HL register into the address stored in the IY register. The address of the special figure game processing timer area is stored in the IY register here.

The correction number obtained by the correction process may be stored in the RAM 111C so that it can be used in another process. Further, even when the correction process is performed, the fluctuation pattern number before the correction is stored in the RAM 111C. This is because the fluctuation pattern number may be used in other processing such as being used for transmitting information to the effect control device 300 as shown below. Further, by storing the variation pattern number in the RAM 111C, the variation pattern number can be maintained even after the end of the variation time, and the variation pattern number can be maintained until the setting of the variation pattern number in the next special figure variation display game. This makes it possible to select the stop time by the fluctuation pattern number and to select the production of the next special figure fluctuation display game according to the fluctuation pattern number of the previous special figure fluctuation display game, which makes it possible to enjoy the game. Can be improved.

Information on the special figure variation pattern is transmitted to the effect control device 300 by transmitting the variation command set in steps Y562 and 563 of FIG. 38. At this time, the information of the fluctuation pattern number before correction is transmitted instead of the correction number. Specifically, the value of the variation command ACTION is used as the variation pattern number. Therefore, there is a missing number in the value transmitted to the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 performs the control process without correcting the fluctuation pattern number acquired from the received fluctuation command. On the data stored in the PROM 321 of the effect control device 300, the information of the special figure fluctuation pattern, which is a missing number in the game control device 100, is also stored without being deleted. Therefore, the fluctuation pattern number and the ranking from the beginning in the table storing the data corresponding to each special figure fluctuation pattern are matched. Since the PROM 321 of the effect control device 300 has a sufficient capacity, there is no problem even if the data corresponding to the missing special figure fluctuation pattern is left, and the burden of control is increased by not performing the correction process. It can be mitigated.

The effect control device 300 can be commonly used by a plurality of types of game control devices 100 having different types of information to be transmitted, and possesses data corresponding to all the information that can be transmitted from the usable game control device 100. doing. Therefore, the special figure variation pattern that is a missing number in the game control device 100 of the present embodiment is used not only in the case of the special figure variation pattern that is no longer used in the development process, but also in other game control devices 100. It may be a special figure fluctuation pattern. In any case, the game control device 100 uses the unique number (variation pattern number) attached to the data held by the effect control device 300, and the unique number not used by the game control device 100 itself is treated as a missing number. Then, in the processing in the game control device 100, the correction number, which is a serial number without a missing number, is calculated and used by the correction processing.

In addition, in the PROM 321 of the effect control device 300, it is assumed that there is data corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern that is a missing number, but the special figure fluctuation pattern that is not used in any of the game control devices 100 is deleted and blank data. May be. That is, the fluctuation pattern number and the rank from the beginning (added value of the address) in the table storing the data corresponding to each special figure fluctuation pattern may be in agreement or proportional relationship.

From the above, a game in which a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, a game in which a state advantageous to the player is generated, the game is comprehensively controlled. The game control means includes a control means (game control device 100) and a slave control means (effect control device 300) that performs control based on information transmitted from the game control means, and the game control means previously provides each of the transmittable information. Information (for example, special figure fluctuation pattern information) is configured to be transmitted to the slave control means using the associated value (command), and the information is classified into a group defined by the type of information. The value associated with each of the multiple pieces of information contained in the group is the value within the range defined for each group, and only some of the values within the range are used. Become. Therefore, by allocating a range of values that is larger than the number of information used in one group, it is not necessary to change the values of other groups even if the number of information increases at the design stage, and development efficiency Can be enhanced.

In addition, the group includes a variable group that includes information about the execution mode of the game (special figure fluctuation pattern) and a symbol group that includes information about the result mode of the game (stop symbol information). , The game control means selects one piece of information from the information included in the variable group and sends it to the subordinate control means at each start of the game, and also selects one piece of information from the information included in the symbol group. It means that it is transmitted to the slave control means. The contents of these groups are often changed in the development of gaming machines, and at least each of these groups can be assigned a range of values that is larger than the number of information used for the group. Even if the number of information increases in the design stage, it is not necessary to change the values of other groups, and the efficiency of development can be improved.

In addition, a game control means for comprehensively controlling a game in a game machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. The information used by the game control means in the processing related to the game is classified into groups defined by the type of information, and each information included in the group is given a unique number which is a different number for each information, and one group. The unique number of each information included in is a discontinuous number, and the game control means corrects the unique number so that it becomes a correction number which is a continuous number for all the information included in the group. Is feasible, and it is possible to perform processing related to the game using the correction number. Therefore, by using continuous correction numbers in the internal processing of the game control means, it is possible to facilitate the handling of the game control means at the time of development and improve the efficiency of development.

Further, a slave control means that controls based on the information transmitted from the game control means is provided, and the game control means transmits the information to the slave control means using the values associated with each of the information in advance. It is configured and the values are assigned corresponding to the unique numbers. When the number of information increases or decreases in the design stage, the correction number changes but the unique number does not change. Therefore, by associating the value with the unique number, it is not necessary to change the value association by increasing or decreasing the number of information, and it is not necessary to change the data of the slave control means, so that the efficiency of development is improved. Can be done.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 displays the result and the variation mode information of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) based on the first start memory stored in the first start storage means of the first variation display game. It serves as the first decision-making means that can be decided before the start of. Further, the game control device 100 displays the result and the variation mode information of the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on the second start memory stored in the second start storage means of the second variation display game. It serves as a second decision-making means that can be decided before the start of. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

From the above, the start winning opening 36 is arranged at a position where the game ball fired on one side of the game area 32 can win, and the normal variable winning device 37 is the game ball fired on the other side of the game area 32. Is arranged at a position where a prize can be won, and the variation mode information of the variation display game includes information on the variation time in which the execution time of the variation display game can be specified, and the second determination is made in the normal state (normal game state). The variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the second variation display game by the means is longer than the variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the first variation display game by the first determination means. Become.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Decorate special figure variable display Set detailed production contents in the game. Information on the start of these special figure variation display games includes a decorative special figure hold number command including information on the number of start memories (holds), a decorative special figure command including information on a stop symbol, and a variation of the special figure variation display game. Examples include variable commands that include information about patterns. By transmitting the decorative special figure command before the variable command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a first variation display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) based on the determination result of the first determination means. .. Further, it can be said that the first variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control related to the first variable display game from the whole of the special figure 1 game processing.
Further, the game control device 100 serves as a second variation display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on the determination result of the second determination means. .. Further, it can be said that the second variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control related to the second variable display game from the whole of the special figure 2 game processing.

Further, the game control device 100 controls the result and variation mode information of the first variation display game determined by the first determination means and the result and variation mode information of the second variation display game determined by the second determination means. As a transmission means capable of transmitting to the effect control means (effect control device 300). Further, when the game control device 100 starts measuring the fluctuation time for each of the first fluctuation display game and the second fluctuation display game according to the start of the fluctuation display game, and the measurement time elapses. It serves as a measurement means for ending the measurement of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game.

In the special figure 2 variation display game in the normal gaming state, a long variation with a very long variation time is set, but in this case, the information about the variation time is not transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the variation is long. You may want to send a command that only indicates that. In the case of long fluctuation, it is sufficient to simply display the fluctuation, and it is not necessary to determine the effect in detail. Therefore, the effect control device 300 starts the variation display based on receiving the command of long variation. The fluctuation time is managed only by the game control device 100, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the end of the fluctuation time, and the effect control device 300 stops the variation display based on receiving the stop command. To do so. In this way, the burden of control on the effect control device 300 can be reduced.

[Time reduction fluctuation frequency update process]
FIG. 42 shows the time reduction fluctuation number update processing (steps Y251 and Y271) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing. In this time reduction fluctuation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure is in the high probability (in the high probability state) (step Y571), and if the special figure is in the high probability (step Y571; Y), the time is reached. The shortened fluctuation count update process is terminated. Further, when the special figure is not in the high probability (step Y571; N), it is determined whether the special figure time is shortened (step Y572). Then, when the special time reduction is not in progress (step Y572; N), the time reduction variation number update process is terminated. Further, when the special figure time reduction is in progress (step Y572; Y), the time reduction variation number is updated by -1 (step Y573), and it is determined whether the time reduction variation number is "0" (step Y574). ..

If the number of time reduction fluctuations is not "0" (step A754; N), the time reduction fluctuation number update process is terminated. When the number of time reduction fluctuations becomes "0" (step Y574; Y), the signal related to the end of the time reduction (for example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned off) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y575). , Signal related to the end of the time saving state (for example, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is turned off, special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal is turned off, normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is turned off, normal electric accessory 1 open extension The status signal (OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y576).
Next, the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step Y577), the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y578), and the normal figure game mode flag area is saved. The flag for no time reduction is saved in (step Y579), and the time reduction variation number update process is completed.

[Special Figure 1 Processing during fluctuation]
FIG. 43 shows the special figure 1 changing process (step Y110) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process. In this special figure 1 changing process, first, the number of times the symbol is fixed is updated by +1 (step Y621). Then, a command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y622), and the effect command setting process (step Y623) is performed.

Next, the decorative special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y624), and the effect command setting process (step Y625) is performed. Since the gaming machine of the present embodiment may be forcibly stopped before the fluctuation time set at the start of the fluctuation, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the fluctuation is stopped. .. Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y626). In the present embodiment, for example, a display time of 600 msec is set in the case of a miss and 2000 msec in the case of a big hit.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is out of alignment, that is, whether the result of the special drawing 1 variation display game is out of alignment (step Y627). If it is out of the special figure 1 (step Y627; Y), the process proceeds to step Y642. Further, if the special figure 1 is not out of alignment (step Y627; N), that is, if it is a big hit, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variable display game is also being executed (step Y628). Whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

Then, when the special figure 2 variation display game is not being executed (step Y628; Y), the process proceeds to step Y639. Further, when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (step Y628; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 display process is being performed (step Y629). That is, in this case, based on the fact that the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a big hit, the running special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a disengagement result. Note that even if the special figure 2 variable display game has already finished the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to forced stop.

If the process during display of special figure 2 is in progress (step Y639; Y), the process proceeds to step Y631. Further, when the special figure 2 is not being processed during display (step Y629; N), the number of times the symbol is fixed is updated by +1 (step Y630), and the special figure 1 is set as the display time of the special figure 2. The display time + 4 msec display time is set (step Y631). By setting the display time of the special figure 1 + the display time of 4 msec as the display time of the special figure 2, the display times of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 end at the same time. Even if the special figure 2 variable display game is already in the display time, the display time is reset and a new display time is started. This resetting extends the stop display time, but may shorten it in some cases.

Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y632), and the decorative special figure 2 off-design command is set and prepared (step Y633). Then, the symbol command is saved in the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y634), and the effect command setting process (step Y635) is performed. After that, the decorative special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y636), the effect command setting process (step Y638) is performed, and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 (step Y638) is performed.

Then, the command is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y639), and the information is loaded from the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area. (Step Y640), the information is loaded from the special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area and saved in the large winning opening opening information area (step Y641). After that, the information is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y642), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y643) is performed to perform the special figure 1 stop symbol area. Ends the process being displayed.

[Special Figure 2 Processing during fluctuation]
FIG. 44 shows the special figure 2 changing process (step Y143) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In this special figure 2 changing process, first, the number of times the symbol is fixed is updated by +1 (step Y651). Then, a command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y652), and the effect command setting process (step Y653) is performed.

Next, the decorative special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y654), and the effect command setting process (step Y655) is performed. Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y656). In the present embodiment, for example, a display time of 600 msec is set in the case of a miss, 600 msec in the case of a big hit, and 136 msec in the case of a small hit.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is out of alignment, that is, whether the result of the special drawing 2 variation display game is out of alignment (step Y657). If it is out of the special figure 2 (step Y657; Y), the process proceeds to step Y677. Further, if the special figure 2 is not out of alignment (step Y657; N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variable display game is also being executed (step Y658). Whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

Then, when the special figure 1 variation display game is not being executed (step Y658; N), the process proceeds to step Y673. Further, when the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (step Y658; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 2 big hit, that is, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (step Y659). ). If the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y659; N), that is, if the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit, the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set (step Y670), and the decorative special figure 1 is interrupted. The command is prepared (step Y671), the effect command setting process (step Y672) is performed, and the process proceeds to step Y673.

That is, in this case, the running special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted based on the fact that the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a small hit. Note that even if the special figure 1 variable display game has already finished the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to interruption. The interrupted special figure 1 variable display game is restarted with the end of the special gaming state (second special gaming state) based on the small hit (second special result).

On the other hand, in the case of a special figure 2 big hit (step Y659; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 display is being processed (step Y660). That is, in this case, based on the fact that the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a big hit, the running special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a disengagement result. Note that even if the special figure 1 variable display game has already finished the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to forced stop.

If the process during display of special figure 1 is in progress (step Y660; Y), the process proceeds to step Y662. If the special figure 1 is not being processed during display (step Y660; N), the number of times the symbol is fixed is updated by +1 (step Y661), and the display time of the special figure 1 is set as the display time of the special figure 2. The display time + 4 msec display time is set (step Y662). By setting the display time of the special figure 2 + the display time of 4 msec as the display time of the special figure 1, the display times of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 end at the same time. Even if the special figure 1 variable display game is already in the display time, the display time is reset and a new display time is started. This resetting extends the stop display time, but may shorten it in some cases.

Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y663), and the decorative special figure 1 off-design command is set and prepared (step Y664). Then, the symbol command is saved in the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y665), and the effect command setting process (step Y666) is performed. After that, the decorative special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y667), the effect command setting process (step Y668) is performed, and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 (step Y669) is performed.

Then, the command is loaded from the decorative special figure 2 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y673), and whether the special figure 2 is a small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit. Determine (step Y674). In the case of a special figure 2 small hit (step Y674; Y), the process proceeds to step Y677. If it is not a special figure 2 small hit (step Y674; N), that is, if it is a big hit, information is loaded from the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step). Y675), load information from the special figure 2 large winning opening opening information area and save it in the large winning opening opening information area (step Y676). After that, the information is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y677), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y678) is performed to perform the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y678). Ends the process being displayed.

[Processing during display of special figure 1]
FIG. 45 shows the process during display of the special figure 1 (step Y111) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process. In this special figure 1 display process, first, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y751), and the big hit flag 1 area is cleared. (Step Y752). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is the big hit information (step Y753), and when the special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y753; Y), the special figure 1 variation display game. The test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on and the special symbol 1 hit signal is turned on) regarding the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y754).

Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is loaded and prepared from the hit symbol command area (step Y755), and the effect command setting process (step Y756) is performed. After that, the fanfare command is prepared (step Y757), and the effect command setting process (step Y758) is performed.
Next, the signal corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of becoming a big hit in the special figure variation display game is saved in the external information output data area (step Y759). In the case of the present embodiment, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 100 ms) corresponding to the jackpot opening information is set (step Y760), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y761). Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y762), and the game is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y763). Further, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (step Y764) is performed to end the processing during display of the special figure 1.

On the other hand, when the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y753; N), that is, when the big hit flag 1 is out-of-order information, it is determined whether it is a high-probability final fluctuation (step Y765), and it is not a high-probability final fluctuation (step Y765). In step Y765; N), it is determined whether or not the time reduction final variation is made (step Y766). Here, when the fall lottery for the running special figure 1 variation display game is won, it is determined that the final variation has a high probability. Further, when the special figure 1 variation display game being executed is the special figure variation display game 100 times (the number of times of support) from the end of the special game state, it is determined that the time is shortened and the final variation is achieved.

Then, if it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y765; N) and if it is not a time-reduced final variation (step Y766; N), the process proceeds to step Y774. Further, in the case of a high probability final variation (step Y765; Y) or a time reduction final variation (step Y766; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y767), and an effect command is provided. The setting process (step Y768) is performed. Next, the probability state command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y769), the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step Y770), and the small hit in Special Figure 2 is in progress, that is, Special Figure 2 It is determined whether or not the player is in a special gaming state to be executed based on the result of the variable display game being a small hit (step Y771).

If the small hit in FIG. 2 is in progress (step Y771; Y), the process proceeds to step Y774. On the other hand, when the small hit in FIG. 2 is not in progress (step Y771; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y772). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be turned off. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y773). As a result, the first game status display unit 56 is turned off, and a display instructing a left-handed strike is made. After that, the special figure 1 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y774), the special figure 1 normal processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y775), and the special figure 1 is Ends the process being displayed.

[Processing during display of special figure 2]
46 and 47 show the process during display of the special figure 2 (step Y144) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process. The special figure 2 display process is the same process as the special figure 1 display process described above for the special figure 2. In this special figure 2 display process, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the small hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y811), and the small hit flag is flagged. Clear two regions (step Y812).

Next, the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 region is loaded (step Y813) in the jackpot flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing, and the jackpot flag 2 region is cleared (step Y814). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is the big hit information (step Y815), and when the special figure 2 is a big hit (step Y815; Y), the special figure 2 variation display game. The test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned ON and the special symbol 2 hit signal is turned ON) related to the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y816).

Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern is loaded and prepared from the hit symbol command area (step Y817), and the effect command setting process (step Y818) is performed. After that, the fanfare command is prepared (step Y819), and the effect command setting process (step Y820) is performed.
Next, the signal corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of becoming a big hit in the special figure variation display game is saved in the external information output data area (step Y821). In the case of the present embodiment, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 100 msec) corresponding to the jackpot opening information is set (step Y822), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y823). Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y824), and the game is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y825). Further, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (step Y826) is performed to end the processing during display of special figure 2.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y815; N), that is, when the big hit flag 2 is the missed information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (small hit information) (step Y827). .. Then, when the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y827; Y), it is determined whether it is a high-probability final fluctuation (step Y828), and when it is not a high-probability final fluctuation (step Y828; N), the time It is determined whether it is the shortened final variation (step Y829). Here, when the fall lottery for the running special figure 2 variation display game is won, it is determined that the final variation has a high probability. Further, when the special figure 2 variation display game being executed is the special figure variation display game 100 times (the number of times of support) from the end of the special game state, it is determined that the time is shortened and the final variation is made.

Then, if it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y828; N) and if it is not a time-reduced final variation (step Y829; N), the process proceeds to step Y834. Further, in the case of a high probability final variation (step Y828; Y) or a time reduction final variation (step Y829; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y830), and an effect command is provided. The setting process (step Y831) is performed. Next, the probability state command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y832), and the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step Y833).
In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state, the big winning opening is opened by the occurrence of a small hit, but the player is not aware of the occurrence of the small hit. In order to do so, the screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed.

Next, a command is loaded and prepared from the hit symbol command area (step Y834), and the effect command setting process (step Y835) is performed. Further, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y836), an effect command setting process (step Y837) is performed, and a signal related to a right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y838). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y839). As a result, the first game status display unit 56 is turned on, and a display instructing a right-handed strike is made.
After that, the area for the number of illegal winnings of the lower prize opening is cleared (step Y840), the flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the flag area for the illegal monitoring period of the lower winning opening (step Y841), and the special figure 2 small hit fanfare processing The transition setting process (step Y857) is performed, and the process during display of special figure 2 is terminated.

Further, when the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y827; N), it is determined whether it is a high-probability final fluctuation (step Y843), and when it is not a high-probability final fluctuation (step Y843; N), the time is shortened. It is determined whether it is the final variation (step Y844). Here, when the fall lottery for the running special figure 2 variation display game is won, it is determined that the final variation has a high probability. Further, when the special figure 2 variation display game being executed is the special figure variation display game 100 times (the number of times of support) from the end of the special game state, it is determined that the time is shortened and the final variation is made.

Then, if it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y843; N) and if it is not a time-reduced final variation (step Y844; N), the process proceeds to step Y850. Further, in the case of a high probability final variation (step Y843; Y) or a time reduction final variation (step Y844; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y845), and an effect command is provided. The setting process (step Y846) is performed. Next, the probability state command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step Y847), and the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y848). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be turned off. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y849). As a result, the first game status display unit 56 is turned off, and a display instructing a left-handed strike is made. After that, the special figure 2 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y850), the special figure 2 normal processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y851), and the special figure 2 is Ends the process being displayed.

That is, the game control device 100 generates a first special game state in which the special variable winning device is opened with the operation of the condition device based on the first special result of the variable display game. A second special game generating means for generating a second special gaming state in which the special variable winning device is opened without operating the condition device based on the second special result of the variable display game as well as the means. Eggplant.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
48 and 49 show fanfare / interval processing (steps Y112, Y145) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special drawing 2 game processing. In this fanfare / interval processing, first, it is determined whether the remaining ball counter is 0 (step Y941), and if the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step Y941; N), the fanfare / interval processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the remaining ball counter is 0 (step Y941; Y), it is determined whether it is the first round (step Y942).

If it is not the first round (step Y942; N), the process proceeds to step Y950. On the other hand, in the case of the first round (step Y942; Y), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 (step Y943). Here, in the present embodiment, the special game state is started by the game ball passing through the normal drawing start gate 34 after the big hit (first special result) is derived in the special figure variation display game. There is.

If the game ball does not pass through the normal drawing start gate 34 (step Y943; N), the fanfare / interval processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the normal drawing start gate 34 (step Y943; Y), the round number upper limit value table is set (step Y944), and the round number upper limit corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is set. The value (10 in the case of the present embodiment) is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value area (step Y945). Further, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y946).

Next, the area of the number of illegal winnings of the upper prize opening is cleared (step Y947), and the flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the area of the flag area of the illegal monitoring period of the upper winning opening (step Y948). After that, the on-output data of the signal during operation of the accessory continuous operation device is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y949), and the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step Y950). Then, the round command corresponding to the large winning opening opening information and the number of rounds is prepared (step Y951), and the effect command setting process (step Y952) is performed.

Next, the initial value of the jackpot processing control pointer corresponding to the jackpot opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y953), the pointer initial value is saved in the jackpot processing control pointer area (step Y954), and the jackpot prize is won. The large winning opening time corresponding to the opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y955). The initial value of the processing control pointer during the jackpot is set to 0 when opening and closing are repeated in one round. In this embodiment, a long opening with V corresponds. Further, when opening once in one round, the jackpot operation end value (2 in the case of this embodiment) is set. The initial value may be set to a value other than 0 according to the number of times of opening and closing in one round.

Next, it is determined whether the lever solenoid operation round is reached (step Y956). The lever solenoid operation round is a round in which the lever solenoid 38f is operated to operate the lever member, and in the case of the present embodiment, it is only a specific round of the first round. Then, in the case of the lever solenoid operation round (step Y956; Y), the operation data of the lever solenoid is set (step Y957). As a result, data is set in the lever solenoid control pointer area, and the lever solenoid control timer is cleared. On the other hand, when it is not the lever solenoid operation round (step Y956; N), the stop data of the lever solenoid is set (step Y958).

After that, 4 is set as the processing number (step Y959), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y960). Then, in the case of the big hit of the special figure 1 (step Y960; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y961), and the big winning opening opening time is set to the special figure 1 game processing timer area. Save to (step Y962). On the other hand, if it is not the big hit of special figure 1 (step Y960; N), that is, if it is the big hit of special figure 2, the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y963), and the big winning opening is opened. The time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y964).

Then, the signal relating to the opening start of the upper prize opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y965). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to ON. Next, in order to open the opening / closing member of the first special variable winning device 38, the upper winning opening on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y966), and the number of winnings to the large winning opening is counted. The number of large winning openings is cleared (step Y967), and the fanfare / interval processing is completed.

In the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, in the special game state based on the big hit (first special game state), only the upper big winning opening (first special variable device 38) is open and small. In the special gaming state based on the hit (second special gaming state), only the lower grand prize opening (second special variable winning device 39) is opened, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the opening / closing mode in the first special game state may be such that the upper prize opening is open in the first round and the lower prize opening is open in the second and subsequent rounds.

[Special figure 1 jackpot end processing]
FIG. 50 shows the special figure 1 jackpot end process (step Y115) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process. In this special figure 1 jackpot end process, first, a subroutine call based on the time reduction determination data is performed (step Y1101). If the time reduction determination data has no time reduction in step Y1101, the jackpot end setting process 1 (step Y1102) is performed, and if the time reduction determination data has time reduction in step Y1101, the jackpot end setting process 2 (step Y1102) is performed. Step Y1103) is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is information passing through the specific area (step Y1104). In the present embodiment, a specific area passage flag is set when the game ball flows into the specific area (probability variation operation area), and when this specific area passage flag is set, it is determined that there is specific area passage information. .. If there is no specific area passage information (step Y1104; N), the process proceeds to step Y1106. On the other hand, when there is specific area passage information (step Y1104; Y), the jackpot end setting process 3 (step Y1105) is performed. Then, the probability information command is loaded from the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1106), and the game ball to the specific area (probability variation operation area) in the special game state based on the normal jackpot (10R normal jackpot in the case of this embodiment). It is determined whether or not the passage is irregular in the specific region, which is the inflow of the (step Y1107).

If the passage is not irregular in the specific region (step Y1107; N), the process proceeds to step Y1109. On the other hand, in the case of irregular passage in the specific area (step Y1107; Y), the irregular probability variation information is added to the probability information command (step Y1108), and the effect command setting process (step Y1109) is performed. By the process of step Y1109, the probability information command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. As the probability information command transmitted here, there are a plurality of commands in which the production mode information is included in any of "high probability / time saving", "low probability / time saving", and "low probability / no time saving". Yes, in the case of irregular passage in the probability variation operation area, irregular probability variation information is added.

Next, "0" related to the special figure 1 normal processing is set as the processing number (step Y1110), and the processing number is saved in the special drawing 1 game processing number area (step Y1111). Next, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1112). Here, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, the signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1113). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 hit signal, and the special symbol 2 hit signal are set to OFF.

Next, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1114), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1115), and the special figure status area is cleared. (Step Y1116). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicates that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. Then, the special figure 2 game wait time value (for example, 8 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1117), and the special figure 1 big hit end process is ended.

By performing this special figure 1 jackpot end processing, it is possible to start the special figure variation display game for both special figure 1 and special figure 2, but in the timer interrupt processing, the special figure 2 game is performed after the special figure 1 game processing. In order to perform the processing, the processing to start the special figure variation display game is performed in the special figure 2 game processing by the timer interrupt that has performed the special figure 1 big hit end processing, and the special figure 2 variation display game is performed rather than the special figure 1 variation display game. Can be started earlier. Therefore, by saving the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area in step Y1117, the start processing of the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt processing, and the special figure 1 The variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interrupt.
That is, the second variable display game execution control means is the first until the game control device 100 can execute the process related to the start of the first variable display game after the end of the special game state. (2) A game processing standby means for preventing the processing related to the start of the variable display game from being in an executable state.

[Special figure 2 jackpot end processing]
FIG. 51 shows the special figure 2 big hit end process (step Y148) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process. The special figure 2 big hit end process is the same process except that step Y1109 in the above-mentioned special figure 1 big hit process is not performed. In this special figure 2 big hit end process, first, a subroutine call is performed based on the time reduction determination data (step Y1131). If the time reduction determination data has no time reduction in step Y1131, the jackpot end setting process 1 (step Y1132) is performed, and if the time reduction determination data has time reduction in step Y1131, the jackpot end setting process 2 (step Y1131) is performed. Step Y1133) is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is specific area passage information (step Y1134), and if there is no specific area passage information (step Y1134; N), the process proceeds to step Y1136. On the other hand, when there is specific area passage information (step Y1134; Y), the jackpot end setting process 3 (step Y1135) is performed. Then, the probability information command is loaded from the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1136), and the game ball to the specific area (probability variation operation area) in the special game state based on the normal jackpot (10R normal jackpot in the case of this embodiment). It is determined whether or not the passage is irregular in a specific region, which is the inflow of the (step Y1137).

If the passage is not irregular in the specific region (step Y1137; N), the process proceeds to step Y1139. On the other hand, in the case of irregular passage in the specific area (step Y1137; Y), the irregular probability variation information is added to the probability information command (step Y1138), and the effect command setting process (step Y1139) is performed. By the process of step Y1139, the probability information command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. As the probability information command transmitted here, there are a plurality of commands in which the production mode information is included in any of "high probability / time saving", "low probability / time saving", and "low probability / no time saving". Yes, in the case of irregular passage in the probability variation operation area, irregular probability variation information is added.

Next, "0" related to the special figure 2 normal processing is set as the processing number (step Y1140), and the processing number is saved in the special drawing 2 game processing number area (step Y1141). Next, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1143). Here, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, the signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1143). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 hit signal, and the special symbol 2 hit signal are set to OFF.

Next, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1144), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1145), and the special figure status area is cleared. (Step Y1146), the special figure 2 jackpot end process is completed. By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicates that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
FIG. 52A shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (steps Y1102, 1132) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In the jackpot end setting process 1, first, the signal relating to the start without shortening the time is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1151). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to OFF. At this point, only the data is set and no output is made.

Next, the signal relating to the start without time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1152). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and the ordinary electric accessory 1 Set the open extension status signal to OFF.
After that, the number without time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1153), and the normal time reduction flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area (step Y1154). Next, the special figure low probability and no time reduction flag are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1155), and the time reduction fluctuation number area for managing the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in the time reduction state is set to 0. Clear (step Y1156).

Next, the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1157). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Next, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1158). As a result, the first game status display unit 56 is turned off, and a display instructing left-handed strike is displayed. After that, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1159), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is terminated. By this process, it becomes a normal game state.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 52B shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (steps Y1103, 1133) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In the jackpot end setting process 2, first, the signal related to the start of the time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1161). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. The big hit 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued.

Next, the signal relating to the start with a short time is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1162). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and the ordinary electric accessory 1 Set the open extension status signal to ON.
After that, the number with the time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1163), and the flag with the time reduction is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area (step Y1164). Next, the special figure low probability and time saving flags are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1165), and the initial time saving fluctuation number area for managing the number of special figure fluctuation display games that can be executed in the time saving state is initially set. Save the value (step Y1166). In the case of this embodiment, since the number of times of support is 100, 100 is saved as an initial value in step Y1166.

Then, the probability information command (time reduction) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1167), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is terminated. By this processing, it becomes the second specific game state with a low probability of special figure. In the case of the present embodiment, the right-handed mode is set during the time saving state, but since the right-handed mode is set from the big hit, the right-handed setting is not performed in the big hit end setting process 2.

[Big hit end setting process 3]
FIG. 53 shows the jackpot end setting process 3 (steps Y1105 and Y1135) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In the jackpot end setting process 3, first, the signal relating to the start of the special figure time reduction is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1171). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. The big hit 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued.

Next, the signal relating to the start with high probability and time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1172). Here, the special symbol 1 high-probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high-probability state signal, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal are set to ON. After that, the number with the time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1173), and the special figure high probability and the time reduction flag are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1174).

Next, the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1175). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Next, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1176). As a result, the first game status display unit 56 is turned on, and a display instructing a right-handed strike is made. After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1177), and the jackpot end setting process 3 is terminated. This process results in a high probability state. That is, by executing the jackpot end setting process 3 after the jackpot end setting process 1, the first specific game state is set, and by executing the jackpot end setting process 3 after the jackpot end setting process 2, the special figure high probability is achieved. It becomes the second specific game state.
By the above processing, it is possible to set a specific gaming state which is a high probability state after the end of the first special gaming state. That is, the game control device 100 increases the probability that the result of the special variation display game becomes a special result higher than the normal state (first specific game state ST2, special figure high probability second specific game state ST3). Is a means for generating a specific game state that can generate.

[Small hit fanfare middle processing]
FIG. 54 shows the small hit fanfare middle process (step Y149) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process. In this small hit fanfare middle process, first, a small hit opening command for opening the lower prize opening is prepared (step Y1201), and an effect command setting process (step Y1202) is performed. Next, 8 related to the small hit medium processing is set as the processing number (step Y1203), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1204).

Next, the small hit opening time (for example, 1600 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1205), and the signal relating to the start of the small hit operation (the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is turned on) is a test signal. Save to the output data area (step Y1206). Then, the lower large winning opening on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1207), the large winning opening count area for counting the number of winnings to the large winning opening is cleared (step Y1208), and the small The processing during the hit fanfare is completed.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
FIG. 55 shows the special figure 2 small hit end process (step Y152) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process. In this special figure 2 small hit end process, first, 0 related to the special figure 2 normal process is set as the process number (step Y1331), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1332).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1333). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1334), the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1335), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1335). Step Y1336). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicates that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure low probability & no time reduction is in progress (step Y1337), and if the special figure low probability & no time reduction is in progress (step Y1337; N), the process proceeds to step Y1340. To do. Further, when the special figure has a low probability and no time reduction (step Y1337; Y), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1338). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1339), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted (step Y1340).

Then, when the special figure 1 variable display game is not interrupted (step Y1340; N), the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1343), and the special figure 2 small hit end process is terminated. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted (step Y1340; Y), the decorative special figure 1 restart command is prepared (step Y1341), and the effect command setting process (step Y1342) is performed. After that, the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1343), and the special figure 2 small hit end process is completed. As a result, the interrupted special figure 2 variable display game is restarted with the end of the special gaming state based on the small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game.

That is, the game control device 100 is operated by the variable display game execution control means of either the first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) or the second variable display game execution control means (game control device 100). When the execution control of the variable display game of is performed, and the other variable display game whose execution is controlled by the other variable display game execution control means has a special result, one of the variable display games is played. It serves as a restart control means capable of executing restart control for resuming one of the variable display games that was interrupted after the special game state based on the other variable display game was completed.

[Game machine status command transmission processing]
FIG. 56 shows the gaming machine state command transmission processing (step X121) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing. In this game machine state command transmission process, first, if the game machine state command transmission timer that manages the interval for periodically transmitting the game machine state command is not 0, the game machine state command transmission timer is updated by -1 (step X601), and the game machine state command is transmitted. It is determined whether the timer has timed up (step X602).

If the game machine status command transmission timer has not timed up (step X602; N), the game machine status command transmission process ends. When the gaming machine status command transmission timer has timed up (step X602; Y), the timer initial value is saved in the gaming machine status command transmission timer area (step X603). Here, 16 ms is set as the initial value. This time is the same as the error monitoring cycle in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step X109), which is one of the error monitoring processes. Of course, other time values may be used.

Next, clear data is set as the gaming machine status command 1 (ACTION) (step X604), and the values indicating the presence or absence of each error are combined (steps X605 to X611) to generate the gaming machine status command 1 (ACTION). (See FIG. 57 (a)). The status flag of each error is set in the process of monitoring the corresponding error. Then, the gaming machine status command 1 (MODE) is prepared (step X612), and the effect command setting process for setting the transmission of the gaming machine status command 1 is performed (step X613).

Next, clear data is set as the gaming machine status command 2 (ACTION) (step X614), and the values indicating the presence or absence of each error are combined (steps X615-X621) to generate the gaming machine status command 2 (ACTION). (See FIG. 57 (b)). The status flag of each error is set in the process of monitoring the corresponding error. Then, the game machine state command 2 (MODE) is prepared (step X622), the effect command setting process for setting the transmission of the game machine state command 2 is performed (step X623), and the game machine state command transmission process is completed.

FIG. 57 shows the structure of the gaming machine state command. Information indicating the presence or absence of an error is set in each bit. Also, the most significant bit is always set to 0 to distinguish it from the command MODE. Information regarding the presence or absence of an abnormality in the gaming machine is transmitted to the effect control device 300 by the gaming machine state commands 1 and 2. Further, the game machine state commands 1 and 2 are periodically transmitted (here, every 16 ms).

As will be described later, in the effect control device 300, when a new command is received while the command storage area is full, the oldest command is overwritten, but the game machine state commands 1 and 2 are periodically executed. Even if the gaming machine status commands 1 and 2 are discarded by overwriting, the gaming machine status can be transmitted by the new gaming machine status commands 1 and 2, and the notification of abnormality etc. can be surely transmitted. It can be carried out.

Note that the gaming machine status commands 1 and 2 may be periodically transmitted only when an abnormality has occurred. Further, when an abnormality has occurred, only the command notifying the occurrence of the abnormality among the gaming machine status commands 1 and 2 may be periodically transmitted, or both the gaming machine status commands 1 and 2 may be transmitted. You may also send it regularly. Further, when the abnormality is resolved in this case, the game machine status commands 1 and 2 indicating that there is no abnormality may be periodically transmitted over a certain period of time. In this case as well, only the command that notified the abnormality that occurred among the game machine status commands 1 and 2 may be transmitted periodically for a certain period of time, or both the game machine status commands 1 and 2 may be transmitted. It may be transmitted periodically over a certain period of time.

It is also possible to select whether or not to periodically transmit one or both of the gaming machine status commands 1 and 2 according to the presence / absence of an abnormality, the type of abnormality occurring, the gaming status, and the like. good. Further, the transmission cycle of the gaming machine state commands 1 and 2 may be selected according to the presence / absence of an abnormality, the type of the abnormality occurring, the gaming state, and the like.

Here, an example of the data structure of ROM 111B is shown in FIG. 58.
As shown in FIG. 58A, the ROM 111B provided in the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 has a program / data area in which a program and fixed data are stored, and arbitrary data such as a program title and version. The ROM comment area where the data can be set, the vector table area where the table for setting the start address of the subroutine of the CALLV instruction and the start address of the timer interrupt processing are stored, and the internal function of the gaming microcomputer 111 are set in hardware. It has an HW (hardware) parameter area in which parameters for storing the data are stored.

In the program / data area, as shown in FIG. 58A, a program area 111Ba for storing various programs, a first unused area 111Bb, and a data area 111Bc for storing various fixed data are stored in this order from the beginning. And a second unused area 111Bd are provided. Then, when the CPU 111A accesses the second unused area 111Bd, an illegal access reset is configured to occur.

As shown in FIG. 58B, the data area 111Bc stores the area A1 for the upper limit judgment value table in which the upper limit judgment value table used for the jackpot judgment is stored, and the performance display in which the data related to the performance display is stored. Areas for various data such as area A3 are provided. Further, an unused area A2 for which access is prohibited is provided between the area A1 for the upper limit determination value table and the area A3 for displaying the performance in the data area 111Bc. Then, when the CPU 111A accesses the unused area A2, an illegal access reset is configured to occur.

The CPU 111A sets the upper limit determination value in the low probability corresponding to the current probability setting value in step X585 of the look-ahead jackpot determination process (FIG. 19) and step Y315 of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 28). At that time, using the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM as a pointer, the upper limit determination value in the low probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is acquired from the ROM 111B and set.
Further, the CPU 111A sets an upper limit determination value in high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value in step X584 of the look-ahead jackpot determination process (FIG. 19) and step Y314 of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 28). At that time, using the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM as a pointer, the upper limit determination value in the high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is acquired from the ROM 111B and set.

In the look-ahead jackpot determination process and the jackpot determination process, the process of determining whether the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is within the normal range (range 0 to 5 in the present embodiment) is not performed. Therefore, even when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is out of the normal range, the data is acquired from the ROM 111B using the value (abnormal value) as a pointer. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 59, when the unused area A2 is not arranged immediately after the area A1 for the upper limit judgment value table, that is, the area A1 for the upper limit judgment value table and the area A3 for displaying the performance. If they are adjacent to each other, an accurate jackpot determination cannot be made, which may cause inconveniences such as a significant jackpot easily or a significantly difficult jackpot.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59, when the area A1 for the upper limit judgment value table and the area A3 for performance display are adjacent to each other, and the upper limit judgment value in a low probability is acquired from the ROM 111B. In addition, when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "5" (within the normal range), the upper limit determination corresponding to "setting 6" in the low probability is made by using the value as a pointer. Values, that is, accurate data can be obtained. On the other hand, when the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is "7" (outside the normal range), the data stored in the performance display area A3 can be stored by using the value as a pointer. That is, incorrect data is acquired. The same applies to the case of acquiring the upper limit determination value in high probability from ROM 111B.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), the unused area A2 is arranged immediately after the area A1 for the upper limit determination value table. As a result, when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is out of the normal range, if an attempt is made to acquire the upper limit determination value from the ROM 111B using the value as a pointer, the unused area (access prohibited area) A2 is displayed. Since it will be accessed, an illegal access reset will occur. As a result, the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM can be initialized, and an abnormality can be notified.

Specifically, when an illegal access reset occurs, the program is restarted and the main processing (FIGS. 10 and 11) is started. At that time, since the processing when a power failure occurs (steps X55 to X61) is not executed before the restart, the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is not the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 in the main processing after the restart. Is determined (step X16; N). Further, at that time, since the setting change operation (operation of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112) is not performed at the time of restarting, the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are used in the main processing after the restart. It is determined that both are in the off state (step X21; N). Therefore, since the processes of steps X25 and X26 are executed, the setting change operation is required, that is, the abnormality is notified. Then, according to this request (notification), the power of the gaming machine is turned on again while executing the setting change operation, so that the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is initialized ( Step X28).

As shown in FIG. 58 (c), the area A1 for the upper limit determination value table may be arranged at the end of the data area 111Bc. In this case, even if the unused area A2 is not placed immediately after the area A1 for the upper limit judgment value table, an illegal access reset occurs when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is out of the normal range. To do. That is, when the area A1 for the upper limit determination value table is arranged at the end of the data area 111Bc, when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is out of the normal range, the value is used as a pointer to the upper limit from the ROM 111B. If the determination value is to be acquired, the second unused area (access prohibited area) 111Bd will be accessed, so that an illegal access reset will occur.

From the above, the game machine 10 of the present embodiment has a control means (game control device 100 (CPU111A)) for controlling the game and a storage means (game) in which information necessary for controlling the game by the control means is stored. The storage area includes the control device 100 (ROM111B)) and is included in the area for the probability value table (area A1 for the upper limit determination value table) among the plurality of storage areas included in the storage means. The probability value assigned to the probability setting value corresponding to is stored, and the control means stores the probability setting value (the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM) stored in the storage means among the plurality of storage areas. Information (data) is acquired from the corresponding storage area, a game lottery (big hit judgment) is performed using the information, and the storage means does not store the information continuously in the area for the probability value table. The used area (unused area A2, second unused area 111Bd) is configured to be arranged (see FIGS. 58 (b) and 58 (c)).
With this configuration, when the probability setting value (value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM) stored in the storage means is out of the normal range, the unused area (unused area A2, The second unused area 111Bd) will be accessed. That is, since the lottery itself is not executed when an accurate lottery result cannot be obtained, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the lottery is remarkably easy to win or the lottery is remarkably difficult to win.

Next, the control by the effect control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs the main process shown in FIG. 60, the timer interrupt process (not shown), and the command reception interrupt process shown in FIG. 61.

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 60, in the main process, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the process at the start of this program, interrupts are first disabled (step C1), and the CPU is initially set (step C2). Next, the initial setting of VDP312 is performed (step C3), and interrupts are enabled (step C4). Next, the generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at the time of power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure detection detected flag and the like are cleared.

After performing the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, the effect button input process (step C9) for creating input information from the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. The input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is read in the timer interrupt process, and in this effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, the effect content is changed.

Then, the hall / player setting mode processing for receiving operations such as setting the changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal and changing the brightness and the volume of the LED and the liquid crystal by the player is performed (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) for updating a random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed.

Next, a reception command check process (step C12) that analyzes commands from the game control device 100 and responds to them is performed, and an effect display editing process (step C13) that edits settings and drawing commands for controlling the progress of the effect is performed. ) To set the end of preparation for the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In the present embodiment, since the system cycle (1 frame 1/30 second) is created, it is determined that the frame switching timing is reached when the V blank interrupt (1/60 second) is inserted twice. The frame switching timing can be changed as appropriate. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) in 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated (frames) at a timing later than 1/60 seconds. (Switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, a sound control process (step C17) that controls the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), and a decoration control process that controls LEDs such as the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 (step). C18), a panel that performs a movable body control process (step C19) that controls the motor, solenoid, and reel 6 of the panel effect device 44, and controls the effect by the notification unit 72, the point notification unit 73, the cumulative value notification unit 74, and the like. The effect setting process (step C20) is performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing the WDT (step C8).

[Command reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 61 shows a command reception interrupt process for storing a command transmitted from the game control device 100 in a command buffer area provided in the RAM 322. The command from the game control device 100 is composed of a MODE indicating the type of the command and an ACTION indicating the content of the command, and a combination of these constitutes one command.

In the command reception interrupt process, first, the reception monitoring timer is stopped (step C101), and the command is read from the reception buffer of the command I / F331 that receives the command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the register of the CPU 311 (step C101). C102), it is determined whether the received command is within the MODE range (step C103). When the received command is in the range of MODE (step C103; Y), the command is saved as a reception MODE in the reception command area provided in the RAM 322 (step C104). The reception command area is an area provided in the RAM 322 and is a dedicated area for temporarily storing received commands. Next, as the MODE reception flag, OK indicating that MODE is being received is set (step C105), the reception monitoring timer is set to 0 and the start (step C106), and the command reception interrupt processing is completed.

On the other hand, when the received command is not in the MODE range (step C103; N), it is determined whether the MODE reception flag is OK (step C107). If the MODE reception flag is not OK (step C107; N), NG indicating that MODE is not received is set as the MODE reception flag (step C120), and the command reception interrupt process is terminated. In this case, the command is not received normally, and the command in the received command area is discarded.

If the MODE reception flag is OK (step C107; Y), it is determined whether the reception monitoring timer has timed out (step C108). When the reception monitoring timer has timed out (step C108; Y), NG indicating that MODE is not received is set as the MODE reception flag (step C120), and the command reception interrupt process is terminated. In this case, the command is not received normally, and the command in the received command area is discarded.

If the reception monitoring timer has not timed out (step C108; N), the command is saved in the reception command area as reception ACTION (step C109), and NG is set as the MODE reception flag (step C110). Next, the reception MODE and the reception ACTION are loaded from the reception command area and prepared (step C111), and the reception command range check process for checking whether the received command is within the valid range as a command is performed (step C112). ).

The effect control device 300 checks the validity after storing the received command in the reception command area provided in the RAM 322. Since there are many types of commands transmitted to the effect control device 300 and the range of commands is wide, the validity check is complicated, and the validity is renewed after the received commands are stored in the received command area provided in the RAM 322 from the register. I try to check it. Therefore, although it takes a long time for processing, accuracy can be ensured.

If the range check by the receive command range check process is not OK (step C113; N), that is, if the range check is out of the valid range as a command, the command reception interrupt process is terminated. In this case, the command is not received normally, and the command in the received command area is discarded. Further, when the range check by the received command range check process is OK (step C113; Y), that is, when the range is valid as a command, it corresponds to the command write index indicating the area for storing the command received this time. The address of the command buffer area to be used is calculated (step C114), and the received MODE and the received ACTION are saved in the calculated command buffer area (step C115). The command buffer area is an area in the RAM 322 for storing commands.

Next, the command write index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C116), and it is determined whether the command reception counter indicating the number of commands stored in the command buffer area is 32 or more (step C117). ). 32 areas for storing commands are prepared in the command buffer area, and when the command reception counter is 32 or more, there is no free space in the command buffer area.

If the command reception counter is not 32 or more (step C117; N), the command reception counter is updated by +1 (step C118), and the command reception interrupt processing ends. In this case, there is free space in the command buffer area, and the command is stored in the free space.

On the other hand, when the command reception counter is 32 or more (step C117; Y), the command read index indicating the area for reading the command is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C119), and the command reception interrupt process is performed. To finish. In this case, there is no free space in the command buffer area, and the new command is overwritten in the area where the oldest command is stored. The command is read so that the oldest command after the overwritten command becomes the next command to be read. Update the index.

[Receive command check process]
FIG. 62 shows the received command check process in the above-mentioned main process. In this received command check process, first, the value of the command reception counter that counts how many commands are received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the number of command receptions (step C201), and the command is received. It is determined whether or not the number is non-zero (step C202). Then, when it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process ends. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of command receptions (step C203).

Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and whether or not the command copying for the number of command receptions is completed is completed. (Step C206). As described above, in the present embodiment, the command is not analyzed directly in the received command buffer, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command is analyzed in the command area. It is configured as. As a result, the command (data) can be moved to create a space in case the command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command. In addition, command analysis can be performed collectively in units of one main process.

If it is determined in step C206 that the copy of the command for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. When it is determined that the copying of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and the received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C210). Then, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands has not been completed (step C210; N), the process returns to the process of step C207. Further, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process is terminated. In this way, in the received command check process, the commands received in one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be saved.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 63 shows the received command analysis process in the above-mentioned received command check process. In this received command analysis process, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte is ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether the MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). When it is determined that the MODE and the ACT are in the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether or not the ACT for the MODE is the correct combination (step C234).

Further, when it is determined in step C232 and step C233 that MODE or ACT is not in the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is not the correct combination (step C232; N, step C233; N). At C234; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is the correct combination (step C234; Y), MODE determines whether or not it is within the range of the variable command (step C235). The variable command is a command that commands the variable pattern of the special figure. Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235; Y), the variable command process (step C236) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not in the range of the variable command (step C235; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the jackpot command (step C237). The jackpot command is a command for commanding an operation related to a big hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) or a command for an operation related to a small hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen, an end screen, etc.). Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the jackpot command (step C237; Y), the jackpot command process (step C238) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Further, in step C237, when it is determined that MODE is not in the range of the jackpot command (step C237; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the symbol command (step C239). The symbol system command is a command for commanding information about the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what the stop symbol of the special symbol should be). Then, when the MODE determines that the range of the symbol-based command is within the range (step C239; Y), the symbol-based command process (step C240) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not in the range of symbol commands (step C239; N), MODE determines whether it is in the range of single-shot commands such as hold count commands and error commands. (Step C241). Single-shot commands are commands that are established independently, unlike commands that make sense in combination, such as symbol commands and variable commands. This one-shot command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold count command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / invalid command, a model specification command, and the like. Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the single-shot command (step C241; Y), the single-shot command process (step C242) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not in the range of the single-shot command (step C241; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the look-ahead symbol command (step C243). When the MODE determines that the command is within the range of the look-ahead symbol command (step C243; Y), the look-ahead symbol command process (step C244) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not in the range of the look-ahead symbol command (step C243; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245). When the MODE determines that the command is within the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245; Y), the look-ahead variable command process (step C246) is performed to end the received command analysis process. If it is determined in step C245 that MODE is not within the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

The look-ahead variable command and the look-ahead symbol command are commands that include information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. The look-ahead effect (also called look-ahead notice or look-ahead notice effect) is whether or not the special figure change display game corresponding to the unexecuted start memory (hold) becomes a big hit when the special figure change display game is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance of (or what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be) with a predetermined reliability, the decorative special figure start memory display or the like to be displayed on the display device 41 may be performed in a mode different from the usual mode, or the display device 41 may be displayed. It is a production such as performing a production display on. The look-ahead command (look-ahead variable command and look-ahead symbol command) is a command that informs in advance of the fluctuation pattern and the stop symbol corresponding to the start memory that is the target of the look-ahead effect, and is from the game control device 100 at the time of winning a start. It is transmitted to the effect control device 300. It should be noted that normal variable commands and symbol commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

[Look-ahead design command processing]
FIG. 64 shows a look-ahead symbol-based command process (step C244) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process. In this look-ahead symbol-based command processing, first, it is determined whether the latest hold information is the special figure 1 hold (step C301). When the latest hold information is the special figure 1 hold (step C301; Y), that is, when the received look-ahead symbol system command is related to the special figure 1 hold, the command corresponds to the special figure 1 hold number. FIG. 1 Saves in the look-ahead symbol command area (step C302), sets the look-ahead variation command reception wait flag (step C304), and ends the look-ahead symbol command processing.

Further, when the latest hold information is not the special figure 1 hold (step C301; N), that is, when the received look-ahead symbol system command is related to the special figure 2 hold, the command corresponds to the special figure 2 hold number. Special figure 2 Saves in the look-ahead symbol command area (step C303), sets the look-ahead fluctuation command reception waiting flag (step C304), and ends the look-ahead symbol command processing. The read-ahead variation command reception waiting flag is set in step C304 because the look-ahead symbol command and the look-ahead variation command (look-ahead variation pattern command) are set (paired).

[Look-ahead variable command processing]
FIG. 65 shows the look-ahead variable command process (step C246) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process. In this look-ahead variation command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead variation command is waiting to be received (step C311). Here, when there is a read-ahead variation command reception waiting flag set in the above-mentioned look-ahead symbol command processing, it is determined that the command is waiting for reception. If the read-ahead variation command is not waiting to be received (step C311; N), the look-ahead variation command processing is terminated. On the other hand, when waiting for the look-ahead variation command reception (step C311; Y), the look-ahead variation command reception wait flag is cleared (step C312).

After that, in the processes of steps C313 to C316, a pre-reading variation command (pre-reading variation pattern command) received from the game control device 100 is converted so as to be convenient for processing by the effect control device 300. First, the process of setting the look-ahead fluctuation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of held numbers of the symbols of the latest hold information (step C313) is performed, and the information of the special figure type of the start memory corresponding to the look-ahead fluctuation system command received this time and the corresponding A MODE conversion table for converting MODE is set according to the current number of reservations of the special figure type.

Next, with reference to the set MODE conversion table, the sub-internal look-ahead variation command MODE corresponding to the look-ahead variation command MODE is acquired (step C314). Further, the look-ahead variation ACT conversion table is set (step C315), and the sub-internal look-ahead conversion command ACT corresponding to the look-ahead variation command ACT is acquired (step C316).

The MODE contains information on the first half fluctuation, but since the content and time of the first half fluctuation set based on this MODE change depending on the number of holds at the time of judgment, the judgment at the time of pre-judgment and the special figure fluctuation display game start. The judgment result may differ depending on the judgment of the time. Therefore, in order to enable easy and reliable processing of the look-ahead notice effect without being affected by the number of holds at the time of judgment, the MODE is converted in a conversion mode according to the current number of holds, and at the time of judgment. It is possible to handle in common regardless of the number of reservations. For example, non-reach out-of-reach fluctuations that may have a short first half fluctuation time depending on the holding situation, and non-reach out-of-reach fluctuations that have a long first half fluctuation time regardless of the holding situation. It is converted into a MODE classified by the matters to be considered in the setting of the look-ahead notice effect so that the process of the look-ahead notice effect can be easily and surely performed.

In addition, the ACT includes information on the latter half fluctuation such as the presence / absence of reach and the type of reach. The content of the latter half fluctuation set based on this ACT does not change depending on the number of holdings at the time of determination. However, even in normal reach, for example, there are various modes even in the same type of reach, as the final stop symbol is set to stop one frame before the reach symbol, to stop one frame ahead, and to hit. Since the ACT corresponding to each of these is set, the range of values is wide. Therefore, by converting the ACTs corresponding to the reach of the same system to the same ACT, the number is reduced, and the processing load such as checking in the processing of the look-ahead notice effect is reduced.

Next, it is determined whether the converted MODE and ACT are both other than 0 (step C317). If both MODE and ACT after conversion are not other than 0 (step C317; N), the command value is abnormal, and the look-ahead variable command processing is terminated. On the other hand, when both the converted MODE and ACT are other than 0 (step C317; Y), the converted command is saved in the latest hold information and the look-ahead variable command area corresponding to the number of holds (step C318), and the MODE is saved. A look-ahead command consistency check process (step C319) for determining whether the combination of ACT and ACT (command combination) is normal is performed.

If the command combination is not normal as a result of the look-ahead command consistency check process (step C319) (step C320; N), the look-ahead variable command process is terminated. On the other hand, when the command combination is normal (step C320; Y), the look-ahead lottery process (step C321) for drawing the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is performed, and it is determined whether the look-ahead notice effect is generated (step C322).

Then, when the pre-reading advance notice effect is not generated (step C322; N), the pre-reading variable command processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the look-ahead notice effect is generated (step C322; Y), is the generated look-ahead notice effect (that is, the look-ahead notice effect selected in the look-ahead lottery process (step C321)) immediately started? Is determined (step C323). The effect that starts immediately is, for example, a pending change notice that changes the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41 from the present time. In addition, the effect that does not start immediately is a pre-reading advance notice effect performed during the execution of the special figure variation display game, and is an effect or variation that continuously generates a specific effect or reach state over a plurality of special figure variation display games. There are effects such as giving a notice by the character appearing during the display, and a pending change notice that changes the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display at a timing later than the present time. As for the timing to start the execution of such an effect that does not start immediately, if the special figure variation display game is being executed, the special figure variation display game ends and the execution of the next special figure variation display game starts. The timing of the game is applicable.

If the effect is not to start immediately (step C323; N), the look-ahead variable command process ends. In this case, the notice is set at the start of the special figure variation display game for executing the look-ahead notice effect. On the other hand, in the case of the effect to be started immediately (step C323; Y), the display corresponding to the selected pre-reading notice effect is set (step C324), and the pre-reading variable command processing is ended.

[Variable command processing]
FIG. 66 shows a variable command process (step C236) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process. In this variable command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure type is undetermined (step C361). The special figure type is information indicating whether the special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2, and is information set in step C251 of the above-mentioned symbol system command processing.

When this special figure type is undecided (step C361; Y), the variable command processing ends. If the special symbol type is not undetermined (step C361; N), that is, if the special symbol type is set, the combination of the variable command and the symbol command is checked (step C362), and the variable command and the symbol type are changed. It is determined whether there is an inconsistency (step C363).

If the variable command and the symbol type are inconsistent (step C363; Y), the variable command process ends. When the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C363; N), the variation pattern type is determined from the variation command (step C364). The symbol type means a category of symbols, and the symbol types include, for example, a missed symbol, a 10R jackpot symbol, a 4R jackpot symbol, and a small hit symbol. The case where the fluctuation command and the symbol type are inconsistent is when the deviation command (variation pattern command) is received, but the symbol command of the 10R jackpot symbol is received. It means that the combination is inconsistent (combination of variable command and symbol type). Also, if one of the commands is discarded or damaged, it will be inconsistent, and in this case as well, processing by the variable command and the symbol command will not be performed.

In the process of determining the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C364), the variation pattern type, which is a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure, is determined according to the received command. Then, the variation effect setting process for setting the information for performing the effect according to the variation command is performed (step C365).

Next, the special figure changing state is set as the P machine state (pachinko machine state) (step C366). Here, "during special map change" means that the special figure is changing (during a customer waiting demonstration, a big hit, or not during fanfare). Further, if the number of pre-reading effects (number of times of pre-reading execution) is not zero, the number of pre-reading effects is updated by -1 (process of reducing the number of pre-reading effects by 1) (step C367), and the variable command processing is terminated.

Here, the look-ahead symbol command and the look-ahead fluctuation command (look-ahead fluctuation pattern command) form combination information in which a plurality of pieces of information are used in combination. In the above-mentioned look-ahead variation command processing, if one of the look-ahead symbol command and the look-ahead variation command that form the combination information is not normal information such as when it is discarded or damaged, the combination is abnormal. If there is, the look-ahead effect executed based on the combination information is not performed (step C320).

In addition, the variable command and the symbol command also form combination information in which a plurality of pieces of information are used in combination. In the above-mentioned variable command processing, if one of the variable command and the symbol command that form the combination information is not normal information such as when it is discarded or damaged, the combination is regarded as inconsistent. The decorative special figure variation display game executed based on the information is not played (step C363).

When one of the combination information is discarded or damaged, it is conceivable that the command buffer area is full and is overwritten by a new command. In particular, since the game machine state commands 1 and 2 are periodically transmitted, if the command processing is delayed due to some problem, the command buffer area may become full and the command may be discarded by overwriting. Of course, it is also possible that the received command is discarded or damaged due to a problem other than the command buffer area being full. For example, it is possible that the command cannot be normally received due to a transmission / reception problem. Then, by not performing the corresponding processing when one of the combination information is discarded or damaged, it is possible to prevent inconvenience due to the existence of inconsistent commands.

If one of the combination information is destroyed or damaged, all the commands included in the combination information may also be destroyed. Further, when one of the combination information is found to be damaged, all the commands included in the combination information may be discarded. In this way, inconvenience due to the existence of inconsistent commands can be prevented, and a free area of the command buffer area can be secured.

Further, in the effect control device 300, since the new command is overwritten when the command buffer area is full, some commands of the combination information are discarded when a part of the combination information exists as the oldest command. Will be done. In the case where the new command is discarded when the command buffer area is full as in the payout control device 200 described later, a part of the combination information is obtained because the new command is a part of the combination information. The command is discarded. In accordance with such destruction, all of the combination information may be destroyed. As a result, it is possible to secure a free area in the command buffer area when the command is received before the processing of the command is started.

Further, the number of information forming the combination information may be three or more, and in this case as well, if at least one piece of information is destroyed or damaged, processing based on the combination information is not performed.

Based on the above, the game control means (game control device 100) that controls the game in a game machine that can execute the game based on the satisfaction of the predetermined conditions and pay out the game medium based on the satisfaction of the predetermined payment conditions. ), And a slave control means (effect control device 300) that performs control based on information (command) transmitted from the game control means, and the slave control means includes a plurality of areas for sequentially storing received information. An information storage means (RAM 322) having a new information storage area (command buffer area) is provided, and when new information is received in a state where there is no free space in the information storage area due to unprocessed information, the oldest information is stored. It is configured to discard information in the area and store new information in the area, and the information includes combination information that uses a combination of multiple pieces of information, and is part of the information contained in the combination information. When the information of is destroyed, it means that the processing executed based on the combination information is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the process from proceeding in an incomplete state and causing further problems.

Further, the slave control means is an effect control means (effect control device 300) that controls the effect based on the effect information forming the information transmitted from the game control means, and the game control means executes the game as combination information. When the variation information (variation command) regarding the mode and the symbol information (symbol command) regarding the result of the game are transmitted to the effect control means, and the effect control means discards one of the variation information and the symbol information, It means that the production related to the game corresponding to the discarded information is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the decoration special figure variation display game from being executed in an incomplete state and causing problems such as an effect that contradicts the result.

Further, the slave control means is an effect control means that controls the effect based on the effect information that forms the information transmitted from the game control means, and the game control means starts the execution right of the game when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A start storage means (game control device 100) that can store up to a predetermined upper limit of memory, and a pre-determination means that determines an execution mode and result of the game based on the start memory before the start of the game based on the start memory. (Game control device 100), and as combination information, pre-reading variation information (pre-reading variation command (pre-reading variation pattern command)) regarding the execution mode of the game based on the determination result determined by the pre-determination means, and the game. The look-ahead symbol information (look-ahead symbol command) related to the result is transmitted to the effect control means, and the effect control means suggests or notifies the determination result by the pre-determination means based on the look-ahead fluctuation information and the look-ahead symbol information. Is possible, and when one of the pre-reading fluctuation information and the pre-reading symbol information is discarded, the pre-reading effect corresponding to the discarded information is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem such as a look-ahead effect being executed in an incomplete state and an effect that contradicts the result.

Further, when the slave control means discards a part of the combination information, the slave control means may also discard other information in the combination information. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the process from proceeding in an incomplete state and causing further problems.

Next, the control executed by the payout microcomputer 211 of the payout control device 200 will be described. The payout microcomputer 211 performs the main process shown in FIG. 67 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 68.

[Main processing]
The main process starts when the power is turned on. In this main process, first, interrupt-disable processing (step A1) is performed, and then interrupt vector setting processing (step A2) for setting the vector address of the jump destination to be executed when an interrupt occurs, and interrupt processing mode. The interrupt mode setting process (step A3) for setting is performed.

Next, access permission is given to the read-write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM (step A4), and all output ports are set to off (no output) (step A5). As a result, the launch permission signal 2 output from the payout control device 200 is also set to off (prohibited state). After that, the stack pointer setting process (step A6) for setting the stack pointer, which is the start address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs, is performed, and the serial port for communicating with the game control device 100 is set. (Step A7).

Then, all the work areas before the access prohibited area are cleared (step A8), all the stack areas after the access prohibited area are cleared (step A9), and the initial values are saved in the area to be initialized (step A10). ). Next, the CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates the timer interrupt signal in the payout microcomputer (clock generator) is activated (step A11). The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the payout microcomputer. The clock generator has a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit and a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) with respect to the CPU of the payout microcomputer based on the divided signal. It is equipped with a CTC circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal of.

After that, the interruption is permitted (step A12), and the firing control determination process for determining whether the game ball can be launched is performed (step A13). In this firing control determination process, it is determined whether the card unit is correctly connected, and if it is correctly connected, the firing permission signal 2 is set to on (permitted state), and if it is not correctly connected, the firing permission signal 2 is set. Set to off (prohibited state).

After that, it is determined whether or not the ball lending control mode for ejecting the game ball is in progress based on the ball lending request from the card unit (step A14). In the ball lending control mode, the ball lending control flag is set, and whether or not the ball lending control mode is in is determined by the presence or absence of the ball lending control flag.

In this ball lending mode (step A14; Y), the ball lending control process (step A15) for performing integrated control regarding ball lending is performed, the payout control process (step A18) is performed, and the error notification editing process (step). Perform A21). By the ball lending control process (step A15) and the payout control process (step A18), a predetermined number of game balls are ejected based on the ball lending request transmitted from the card unit when the player performs the ball lending operation. ..

On the other hand, when the ball lending control mode is not in progress (step A14; N), the prize ball control for discharging the game ball based on the payout command (prize ball command) transmitted from the game control device 100 due to the occurrence of a prize in the winning opening. It is determined whether the mode is in progress (step A16). The prize ball control mode is a state in which the prize ball control flag is set, and whether or not the prize ball control mode is in is determined by the presence or absence of the prize ball control flag.

In this prize ball control mode (step A16; Y), the prize ball control process (step A17) for performing integrated control of the prize ball is performed, the payout control process (step A18) is performed, and the error notification editing process is performed. (Step A21) is performed. By the prize ball control process (step A17) and the payout control process (step A18), a predetermined number of game balls are ejected based on the payout command transmitted from the game control device 100 when a prize is generated in the winning opening.

In the payout control process (step A18), sequence control necessary for performing a common game ball payout operation in payout of prize balls and payout of rental balls is performed. When the payout of the prize ball or the prize ball is completed by this payout control process, the ball lending control flag and the prize ball control flag are cleared, and the ball lending control mode and the prize ball control mode are terminated. There is.

When the prize ball control mode is not in progress (step A16; N), an overpayment error monitoring process (step A19) is performed to monitor the occurrence or cancellation of an error in which the game ball is excessively paid out. The release of the overpayment error is performed based on the operation of the error release switch provided in the payout control device 200.

Then, the payout device control start determination process (step A20) for setting the start of the ball lending control mode and the prize ball control mode is performed, and the error notification editing process (step A21) is performed. In the error notification editing process (step A21), the status of various errors is determined, the display data of the error status display device provided in the payout control device 200 is edited, the information transmitted to the game control device 100 is edited, and the test firing test is performed. Performs processing such as editing signal output data. After that, the condition regarding the output of the payout busy signal indicating to the game control device 100 whether the payout control can be started is determined, and the payout busy signal editing process (step A22) for editing the output data of the payout busy signal is performed. , Return to step A13.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing in the payout control device 200 will be described. The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 211A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the payout microcomputer, the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 68 is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, first, a register save process (step A31) for transferring the value held in the predetermined register to the RWM is performed. In the Z80 series microcomputer used as the payout microcomputer in this embodiment, the processing can be replaced by saving the value held in the front register in the back register. Next, based on the output data set in various processes, output processing (step A32) for performing drive control of the payout motor and the like is performed, and input from various sensors and switches and signal capture, that is, each An input process (step A33) for reading the state of the input port is performed.

Next, a timer update process (step A34) for updating various timers is performed, and a command reception process for receiving a command from the game control device 100 is performed (step A35). Then, a ball lending request monitoring process (step A36) is performed, in which a ball lending request or the like from the card unit is checked, and a setting is made to enable the payout of prize balls or ball lending. After that, an input monitoring process (step A37) for monitoring the input switch system signals such as the payout ball detection switch 81, the shoot ball out switch 82, the overflow switch 83, the signal from the frame radio wave sensor 84, and the abnormality detection signal 1. I do.

Then, the payout unit editing process (step A38) for editing the control signal of the payout motor is performed, and the payout prize ball signal to be transmitted to an external device such as a hall computer is edited every time the number of prize balls actually paid out reaches a predetermined number. Performs the external information editing process (step A39). Subsequently, an interrupt end declaration is made (step A40), a process of restoring the register data saved in step A31 (step A41) is performed, and then a process of permitting an interrupt (step A42) is performed to perform a timer interrupt process. To finish.

[Command reception processing]
FIG. 69 shows a command reception process (step A35) in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 68. In this command reception process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a received command in the serial reception buffer register of the serial communication circuit that receives the command transmitted from the game control device 100 (step A51). If there is no received command (step A51; N), the command reception process ends. If there is a received command (step A51; Y), the received command is read from the receive buffer register to the register of the CPU 211A (step A52).

Next, it is determined whether the receive command read into the register of the CPU 211A has a normal value (step A53), and if it is not a normal value (step A53; N), the command reception process ends. In this case, the received command is discarded. If the value is normal (step A53; Y), it is determined whether the receive buffer area, which is the storage area provided in the RAM 211B, is full (step A54).

When the reception buffer area is full (step A54; Y), the command reception process ends. In this case, the received command is discarded. If the receive buffer area is not full (step A54; N), the number of received commands in the command reception counter indicating the number of commands stored in the receive buffer area is updated by +1 (step A55). In the receive buffer area of the present embodiment, 16 areas for storing received commands are prepared, and when the command reception counter is 16, it is determined that the receive buffer area is full. There is. The number of storage areas provided in the reception buffer area can be arbitrarily set and may be one.

After that, the address of the receive buffer area corresponding to the command write index indicating the area for storing the command received this time is calculated (step A56), and the received command is saved in the calculated receive buffer area (step A57). Then, the command write index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 15 (step A58), and the command reception process is completed.

The number of commands transmitted to the payout control device 200 is smaller than the number of commands transmitted to the effect control device 300. Therefore, the number of areas for storing the commands received by the payout control device 200 (16 in this case) is smaller than the number of areas for storing the commands received in the effect control device 300 (32 in this case). ..

FIG. 70 is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the command reception process executed by the CPU 211A of the payout control device 200. Each program list of the game control program executed by the payout control device 200 is a list of instructions in assembly language (source code) similar to Z80, which is an 8-bit microprocessor, except for pseudo instructions (instructions for the assembler) and the like. , There is a one-to-one correspondence with the machine language instruction (machine code) stored in the ROM 211B (game control program storage means).

From the left side, the description of the instruction (code) in each program list is the "line number" attached for convenience, the "mnemonic" indicating the operation content (calculation content) of the instruction, the "operand" of the instruction target, and the convenience of explanation. It is divided into "comments" attached for. The instructions in the program list are basically executed from the top to the bottom of the program list in the order of line numbers (from small to large) unless there is an instruction to call a subroutine or a jump instruction (branch instruction).

The codes at line numbers 4020 and 4030 correspond to the processing in step A51. Line number 4020 loads the value of the receive buffer status register (value corresponding to label C_RXBST), which is a register indicating how many bytes of data have been received in the A register. At line number 4030, the command reception process ends when there is no receive command.

The codes of line numbers 4060 to 4090 correspond to the processing of steps A52 and A53. Line number 4060 loads the received command (value corresponding to label C_RXBUF) in the W register, and line numbers 4070 to 4080 terminate when the loaded value is not defined as a command. That is, the validity is checked on the register of the CPU 211A before the received command is stored in the RAM 211C. Since there are few types of commands sent to the payout control device 200 and the range of commands is narrow, it is easy to check the validity, and the check is performed before storing in the receive buffer area to speed up the process. ..

The codes of line numbers 4120 to 4150 correspond to the processing of steps A54 and A55. At line number 4120, the command reception counter (numerical value corresponding to label R_COM_CNT + 00H) is loaded into the HL register. In line numbers 4130 and 4140, if the loaded value is 16, the receive buffer area is full, so the process ends. Line number 4150 updates the number of received commands by +1 when the receive buffer area is not full.

The codes of line numbers 4180 to 4200 correspond to the processing of steps A56 and A57. At line number 4180, the start address of the receive buffer area (numerical value corresponding to label R_COM_BUF + 00H) is loaded into the HL register, and at line number 4190, the command write index (numerical value corresponding to label R_WRIT_IDX + 00H) is loaded into the A register. In line number 4200, the command stored in the W register is stored at the address corresponding to the value obtained by adding the value of the A register to the HL register.

The codes in line numbers 4230 to 4250 correspond to the processing in step A58. At line numbers 4230 and 4240, the value of the A register is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 15. In line number 4250, the value of the A register is stored in the command write index area (label R_WRIT_IDX + 00H).

[Payout device control start determination process]
FIG. 71 shows the payout device control start determination process (step A20) in the main process shown in FIG. 67. In this payout device control start determination process, first, it is determined whether or not a payout excess error is occurring (step A61). The overpayment error is an error that occurs when the cumulative value of the number of balls paid out more than the number of balls to be paid out in the prize ball or ball lending becomes a predetermined number (for example, 16). If this payout excess error is in progress (step A61; Y), the payout device control start determination process ends. Further, when the payout excess error is not in progress (step A61; N), it is determined whether or not the ball lending request has been detected (step A62). The ball lending request is a request for paying out the ball lending input from the card unit based on the operation of the player, and the ball lending request has been detected means that the ball lending request is detected and then the ball lending request is detected. It is a state until the ball lending operation based on is started.

When the ball lending request has been detected (step A62; Y), the payout device control mode flag is set to the ball lending control mode in-progress flag (step A74), and the payout device control start determination process ends. Since the confirmation of the detection of the ball lending request is performed before the process of paying out the prize balls shown below, the ball lending control mode flag is set by overwriting the prize ball control mode flag. That is, if both the payout of the prize ball and the payout of the rental ball are feasible, the payout of the rental ball is given priority.

If the ball lending request has not been detected (step A62; N), it is determined whether the prize ball payout start prohibition state is set (step A63). The prize ball payout start prohibition state is a state in which the start of prize ball payout is prohibited, and is set based on the frame radio wave sensor 84 detecting the radio wave during the occurrence of the frame radio wave error, or the sensor or proximity. This applies when a switch error is occurring, which is set based on the detection of an abnormal condition such as an illegal switch lead wire being short-circuited, a sensor or switch being disconnected from the connector, or a lead wire being disconnected and floating. .. When the prize ball payout start prohibition state is in the state (step A63; Y), the payout device control start determination process ends. If the prize ball payout start prohibition state is not set (step A63; N), it is determined whether or not there is a received command in the reception buffer area of the RAM 211C (step A64).

When there is a receive command in the receive buffer area (step A64; Y), the number of received commands in the command reception counter is updated by -1 (step A65), and the receive buffer corresponding to the command read index indicating the area for reading the command next. The region is calculated (step A66). Then, the receive command is read from the calculated receive buffer area (step A67), the read receive buffer area is cleared (step A68), and the command read index is updated by -1 in the range of 0 to 15 (step A69). ..

Next, it is determined whether the received command is a normal value (step A70). The payout control device 200 determines the validity not only in the determination of the validity at the time of receiving the command but also in the processing corresponding to the command. If the received command is not a normal value (step A70; N), the process returns to step A64. In this case, the read command is discarded. If the reception command is a normal value (step A70; Y), the number of prize balls corresponding to the reception command is added to the remaining number of acquired game balls (step A71), and the process returns to step A64. The remaining number of acquired game balls is the number of prize balls for which payout has not been completed among the prize balls for which payout has been set based on the payout command.

When the processing of steps A64 to A71 is repeated and there is no reception command in the reception buffer area (step A64; N), it is determined whether or not the remaining number of acquired game balls is 0 (step A72), and the remaining number of acquired game balls remains. If it is 0 (step A72; N), the payout device control start determination process is terminated. If the remaining number of acquired game balls is not 0 (step A72; Y), the prize ball control mode flag is set in the payout device control mode flag (step A73), and the payout device control start determination process ends.

That is, the card unit serves as a ball lending signal control means for outputting a ball lending command (ball lending request) related to the ejection of the lending ball based on the operation of the player. Further, the payout control device 200 has a prize ball command (payout command) transmitted from the game control means (game control device 100) and a ball lending command (ball lending request) transmitted from the ball lending signal control means (card unit). Based on the above, the payout control means for controlling the payout of the game ball is formed.

[Payout busy signal editing process]
FIG. 72 shows the payout busy signal editing process (step A22) in the main process shown in FIG. 67. In this payout busy signal editing process, on-data of the payout busy signal is set when the payout control of the prize ball cannot be started (step A97), and the payout busy signal is turned off when the payout control of the prize ball can be started. Set the data (step A96).

The case where the payout control of the prize ball cannot be started means that the payout is prohibited (step A91; Y), the ball lending control mode or the prize ball control mode is not in the standby operation (step A92). Y), when the shoot-out switch is in an undetermined state (step A93; Y), when the overflow switch is in an undetermined state (step A94; Y), and when the receive buffer area is full (step A95; This is the case in any of the states of Y).

In addition, the payout prohibition state is when an error such as a shoot ball out error (ball out), overflow error (overflow), frame radio wave error, switch error, or overpayment error has occurred. Is set to. Further, the undetermined state of the switch is a state in which the detection state of the switch is not determined. The detection state of the switch is determined when the state in which the switch detects an error state or a normal state (on or off) continues for a specified time. Since the detection state of the switch is reset when the power is turned on, the detection state of the switch is in an undetermined state until the error state or the normal state of the switch continues for a specified time. If the error status is continuously detected for a specified time and the switch detection status is confirmed as an error status, the error status is canceled if the error status is not detected for a predetermined time. It is designed to do.

The game control device 100 does not transmit a payout command when the payout busy signal is on. Since the payout control device 200 does not have a backup function in the event of a power outage, if the payout commands are sent one after another during the payout of prize balls or rental balls or in a situation where the payout cannot be made, a prize will be given in the event of a power outage. The memory of the number of balls disappears, and accurate payout becomes impossible. In addition, the receive buffer area for storing commands may become full. Therefore, the payout busy signal indicates whether or not the payout command can be received so that the payout command can be received only when the payout control can be started immediately.

Since the command is not transmitted from the game control device 100 in the state where the command cannot be processed in this way, basically, the receive buffer area is full, or a new command is added when the receive buffer area is full. Will not be received. Therefore, when a new command is received while the reception buffer area is full, some abnormality has occurred in the game control device 100 or the payout control device 200, fraudulent activity has been performed, or noise. It is highly possible that the new command is not a normal command because it may have been affected by such factors.

Therefore, the payout control device 200 discards the new command when a new command is received while the receive buffer area is full. That is, the oldest command stored in the receive buffer area is likely to be the command sent before the abnormal state occurred, and if the oldest command is overwritten with a new command, the command is normal. May be overwritten with an invalid command. Therefore, it is possible to minimize the influence on the game by discarding a new command that is likely to be an invalid command.

FIG. 73 shows an outline of processing when a command is received by the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200. In the effect control device 300, the command received from the game control device 100 is stored in the register of the CPU 311 (step S11), and then stored in the reception command area which is a dedicated area of the RAM 322 (step S12). Then, the command is fetched from the reception command area, which is a dedicated area, to the register of the CPU 311 to confirm the validity (step S13).

If the received command is not a normal value (step S14; N), the received command is discarded. If the received command has a normal value (step S14; Y), the address of the command buffer area, which is the command storage area of the RAM 322, is calculated (step S15). Then, when the command buffer area, which is the command storage area of the RAM 322, is not full (step S16; N), the command is stored at the calculated address. When the command buffer area, which is the command storage area of the RAM 322, is full (step S16; Y), the new command is overwritten and stored at the address where the oldest command is stored.

The payout control device 200 stores the command received from the game control device 100 in the register of the CPU 211A (step S21), and then confirms the validity on the register (step S22). If the received command is not a normal value (step S23; N), the received command is discarded. If the received command has a normal value (step S23; Y), the address of the receive buffer area, which is the command storage area of the RAM 211C, is calculated (step S24). Then, when the receive buffer area, which is the command storage area of the RAM 211C, is not full (step S25; N), the command is stored at the calculated address (step S26). If the receive buffer area, which is the command storage area of the RAM 211C, is full (step S25; Y), the received command is discarded (step S28).

As described above, the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 are different in the processing of the command received from the game control device 100. Since the payout control device 200 confirms the validity of the command on the register of the CPU 211A, the number of processes is small and high-speed processing is possible. There are few types of commands to the payout control device 200, and it is easy to confirm the validity, and even if they are processed on the register, no inconvenience occurs. On the other hand, the effect control device 300 stores the received command in the dedicated area of the RAM 322 and then confirms the validity. Since the number and types of commands transmitted to the effect control device 300 are larger than those of the payout control device 200 and the validity confirmation process is complicated, the validity is confirmed once stored in the RAM 322. We are making sure that processing can be performed.

Further, when the storage area of the command is full, the payout control device 200 discards the new command. As described above, the command storage area does not usually fill up, it is in some abnormal state, and the new command is likely to be an invalid command. If the payout is made by such an illegal command, the payout may be larger than planned. In particular, it is possible that a large number of commands are being sent due to fraudulent activity, so it is possible to prevent fraudulent payouts by discarding new commands.

On the other hand, in the effect control device 300, the new command is replaced with the oldest command. Even in the effect control device 300, the command storage area does not normally become full, and it is conceivable that it is in some abnormal state. When the command is received, the contents of the command have not been analyzed yet, and it may be an important command. Therefore, even if the command storage area is full, a new command should be saved and the necessary command should be saved. Is prevented from being discarded. Also, the new command is more likely to be more relevant to the current situation than the old command, and the old command is often no longer needed, so save the new command. ing.

Further, the game control device 100 periodically transmits game machine status commands 1 and 2 including information on the presence or absence of an abnormality in the game machine, and when there is no space in the command storage area, this is used. It is conceivable that a plurality of game machine status commands 1 and 2 are stored. The game machine status commands 1 and 2 represent the current status of the most recently received command, and there is no need for the old command, so there is no problem even if they are discarded by overwriting. Further, even if the newest gaming machine status commands 1 and 2 are discarded by overwriting, there is no problem in grasping the status of the gaming machine because they are periodically transmitted.

Although the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 have been described here, the same processing can be performed for other slave control devices that receive information from the game control device 100. In this case, depending on the nature of the slave control device, it is selected whether the processing is the same as that of the effect control device 300 or the same processing as that of the payout control device 200. Further, the processing method of such a command can be applied not only to the control device that receives the command from the game control device 100, but also to any control device that receives the command from another control device. Is.

Based on the above, the game control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game in the game machine capable of executing the game based on the fulfillment of the predetermined conditions and paying out the game medium based on the fulfillment of the predetermined payout conditions. ), The effect control means (effect control device 300) that controls the effect based on the effect information transmitted from the game control means, and the payout control that controls the payout of the game medium based on the payout information transmitted from the game control means. The effect control means includes means (payout control device 200), and the effect control means includes effect information storage means (RAM 322) having an effect information storage area (command buffer area) for storing received effect information, and unprocessed effect information. When new production information is received when there is no space in the production information storage area, the oldest production information is discarded and the new production information is stored, and the payout control means stores the received payout information. A payout information storage means having a payout information storage area is provided, and when new payout information is received in a state where there is no space in the payout information storage area due to unprocessed payout information, the new payout information is discarded. It will be done. Therefore, it is possible to take measures according to each control means when the received command cannot be stored, and the influence on the progress of the game can be minimized. Can be.

In addition, a game control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls a game in a game machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and paying out a game medium based on the establishment of a predetermined payout condition. It includes a first slave control means (for example, an effect control device 300) and a second slave control means (for example, a payout control device 200) that form a slave control means that performs control based on information transmitted from the game control means. The first slave control means and the second slave control means each include information storage means (RAM 322, RAM 211C) having an information storage area including a plurality of areas for sequentially storing received information, and the first slave control means of the first slave control means. The first control means has a larger number of areas than the second slave control means, and the first control means is the oldest information when new information is received in a state where the information storage area is full due to unprocessed information. When the information in the area in which the information is stored is discarded and new information is stored in the area, and the second control means receives new information in a state where there is no space in the information storage area due to unprocessed information, the second control means receives the new information. It means that the new information is destroyed. Therefore, when the received command cannot be stored, it is possible to take measures according to the number of storage areas in each control means, and the influence on the progress of the game can be minimized. The response to can be made appropriate.

Further, the first slave control means is an effect control means (effect control device 300) that controls the effect based on the effect information forming the information transmitted from the game control means, and the second slave control means is the game control means. It is a payout control means (payout control device 200) that controls the payout of the game medium based on the payout information forming the information transmitted from. Therefore, it is possible to take measures according to each control means when the received command cannot be stored, and the influence on the progress of the game can be minimized. Can be.

Further, in a game machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and paying out a game medium based on the establishment of a predetermined payout condition, a game control means for comprehensively controlling the game and a game control means are transmitted. Information having a slave control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300) that performs control based on the received information, and the slave control means has an information storage area including a plurality of areas for sequentially storing received information. A write index that includes storage means (RAM 322, RAM 211C) and indicates an area for storing new information, a read index that indicates an area for reading information next, and information that indicates the number of areas in which information is currently stored. A counter (command reception counter) will be provided. Therefore, the writing area and the reading area of the information can be appropriately grasped, and the information of the free area at the present time can be obtained, the reading and writing of the information can be appropriately managed, and the control process can be performed efficiently.

Further, the slave control means includes an effect control means that controls the effect based on the effect information that forms the information transmitted from the game control means, and a game medium that is paid out based on the payout information that forms the information transmitted from the game control means. The effect control means includes, as information storage means, an effect information storage unit (RAM 322) having an effect information storage area forming an information storage area for storing received effect information, and includes information. When the effect information counter that forms the counter is in a state indicating that there is no space in the effect information storage area and receives new effect information, the information in the area that stores the oldest effect information is discarded and the relevant effect information is received. The payout control means, which stores new effect information in the area, includes a payout information storage means (RAM211C) having a payout information storage area forming an information storage area for storing received payout information, and an information counter. If the payout information counter is in a state indicating that there is no space in the payout information storage area and receives new payout information, the new payout information is discarded. Therefore, it is possible to take measures according to each control means when the received command cannot be stored, and the influence on the progress of the game can be minimized. Can be.

Further, as a game control means for comprehensively controlling a game in a game machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. The game control means includes an effect control means that controls the effect based on the effect information transmitted from the game control means, and the game control means includes information on whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the game machine as the effect information. Information can be periodically transmitted to the effect control means, and the effect control means includes an effect information storage unit having an effect information storage area for storing the received effect information, and the unprocessed effect information is used in the effect information storage area. When new production information is received when there is no space, the oldest production information is discarded and the new production information is stored. Only the latest game machine status information is required, and the old one is no longer necessary. Therefore, it is possible to minimize the influence on the progress of the game in dealing with the case where the received command cannot be stored, and it is possible to take appropriate measures against the problem.

In addition, the game control means periodically transmits the game machine status information only when an abnormality has occurred in the game machine. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the command transmission frequency from becoming high in a normal case, and it is possible to reduce the burden of control. Further, since the abnormality is transmitted periodically when an abnormality has occurred, no problem occurs even if the command is missed, and the abnormality can be reliably notified to the effect control means.

In addition, the game control means periodically transmits the game machine status information for a certain period of time when the abnormality generated in the game machine is resolved. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the effect control means that the abnormality has been resolved.

Further, the effect control means includes an effect calculation processing means (CPU311) which is an arithmetic processing means for performing arithmetic processing for the effect, an effect information storage means (RAM 322) having an effect information storage area for storing received effect information, and an effect information storage means (RAM 322). When the effect information is received, the effect information is stored in the effect information storage area without performing the predetermined processing executed for the effect information on the register of the effect calculation processing means. The payout control means performs predetermined processing on the effect information, and has a payout calculation processing means (CPU211A) which is an arithmetic processing means for performing arithmetic processing on the payout, and a payout information storage area for storing the received payout information. A means (RAM211C) is provided, and when the payout information is received, the payout information is stored in the payout information storage area after performing predetermined processing on the payout information on the register of the payout calculation processing means. It becomes. The type and range of contents of the received command differ depending on the control means, and the control process can be efficiently advanced by making the process of the received command suitable for each control means.

In addition, the predetermined process is a legitimacy determination process for determining the legitimacy of the effect information or the payout information, and when the legitimacy determination process determines that the effect information or the payout information is not valid, the effect information or the payout information is discarded. It means that it was done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring based on an invalid command. The legitimacy determination process for determining the legitimacy of the effect information and the legitimacy determination process for determining the legitimacy of the payout information may be different processes or may be the same process.

Further, when the effect information is received, the effect control means stores the effect information in a dedicated area of the effect information storage area, then performs a legitimacy determination process on the effect information, and is legitimate by the legitimacy determination process. When it is determined that the effect information is stored in the storage area of the effect information storage area, the payout control means receives the payout information on the register of the payout calculation processing means. This means that the payout information is stored in the payout information storage area after the validity determination process is performed. Therefore, since it is stored in the storage area only when the validity is confirmed, unnecessary commands are not stored in the storage area, and the control process can be efficiently advanced.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above-described embodiment as the gaming machine, and is not limited to, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. It is applicable to all gaming machines that use the gaming ball of. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. This slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as a slot machine that uses a game ball.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered to be exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and it is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

10 Game machine 100 Game control device (game control means)
300 production control device (subordinate control means)

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result.
A game control means that controls the game in an integrated manner ,
A subordinate control means that controls based on the information transmitted from the game control means is provided.
The information the game control means used are classified into groups defined by the type of information, each information included in said group while others unique number is different numbers in the individual information is attached, one By using only a part of the information included in the group, the unique number used is a discontinuous number.
The game control means
Is capable of executing a correction process for correcting the unique number is discontinuous such that the corrected number is a consecutive and number state, and are capable of performing processing relating to a game using the correction number ,
The slave control means
A gaming machine characterized in that it holds data corresponding to information that is not used by the gaming control means among the information included in the group.

Images